ChipFind - документация

Электронный компонент: CXD3048R

Скачать:  PDF   ZIP
1
E02653A37
Sony reserves the right to change products and specifications without prior notice. This information does not convey any license by
any implication or otherwise under any patents or other right. Application circuits shown, if any, are typical examples illustrating the
operation of the devices. Sony cannot assume responsibility for any problems arising out of the use of these circuits.
CXD3048R
120 pin LQFP (Plastic)
CD Digital Signal Processor with Built-in Digital Servo +
Shock-proof Memory Controller + Digital High & Bass Boost
Description
The CXD3048R is a digital signal processor LSI for CD
players. This LSI incorporates a digital servo, high & bass
boost, shock-proof memory controller, 1-bit DAC and
analog low-pass filter.
Features
All digital signal processing during playback is
performed with a single chip
Highly integrated mounting possible due to a built-in RAM
Digital Signal Processor (DSP) Block
Supports CAV (Constant Angular Velocity) playback
Frame jitter free
0.5
to 4
speed continuous playback possible
Allows relative rotational velocity readout
Wide capture range playback mode
Spindle rotational velocity following method
Supports 1
to 4
speed playback
Supports variable pitch playback
The bit clock, which strobes the EFM signal, is
generated by the digital PLL.
EFM data demodulation
Enhanced EFM frame sync signal protection
Refined super strategy-based powerful error correction
C1: double correction, C2: quadruple correction
Supported during 4
speed playback
Noise reduction during track jumps
Auto zero-cross mute
Subcode demodulation and subcode-Q data error
detection
Digital spindle servo
16-bit traverse counter
Asymmetry correction circuit
CPU interface on serial bus
Error correction monitor signal, etc. output from a new
CPU interface
Servo auto sequencer
Fine search performs track jumps with high accuracy
Digital audio interface outputs
Digital level meter, peak meter
Bilingual compatible
VCO control mode
CD TEXT data demodulation
Digital Out can be generated from the audio serial
input. (also supported after shock-proof and digital
bass boost processing, subcode-Q addition function)
Digital Servo (DSSP) Block
Microcomputer software-based flexible servo control
Offset cancel function for servo error signal
Auto gain control function for servo loop
E:F balance, focus bias adjustment functions
Surf jump function supporting micro two-axis
Tracking filter: 6 stages
Focus filter: 5 stages
Shock-proof Memory Controller Block
Supports an external 4M-bit/16M-bit DRAM
Time axis-based data linking
ADPCM compression method (uncompressed/4 bits/
6 bits/8 bits)
Digital Filter, DAC and Analog Low-pass Filter Blocks
Digital dynamic bass boost and high boost
Bass Boost: 4th-order IIR 24dB/Oct
+10dB/+14dB/+18dB/+22dB
High Boost: Second-order IIR 12dB/Oct
+4dB/+6dB/+8dB/+10dB
Independent turnover frequency selection possible
Bass Boost: 125Hz/160Hz/200Hz
High Boost: 5kHz/7kHz
Digital dynamics (compressor)
Volume increased by +5dB at low level
8
oversampling digital filter
(attenuation: 61dB, ripple within band: 0.0075dB)
Digital signal output possible after boost
Serial data format selectable from (output) 20 bits/
18 bits/16 bits (rearward truncation, MSB first)
Digital attenuation:
, 60 to +6dB, 2048 steps (linear)
Soft mute
Digital de-emphasis
High-cut filter
Applications
CD players
Structure
Silicon gate CMOS IC
Absolute Maximum Ratings
Supply voltage V
DD
, AV
DD
Vss 0.5 to +3.5
V
Input voltage
V
I
Vss 0.3 to V
DD
+ 0.3
V
Output voltage V
O
Vss 0.3 to V
DD
+ 0.3
V
Storage temperature
Tstg
55 to +150
C
Supply voltage difference
AV
SS
V
SS
0.3 to +0.3
V
AV
DD
V
DD
0.3 to +0.3V (AV
DD
< 1.7V)
AV
DD
V
DD
0.3 to +1.0V (AV
DD
= 1.7 to 2.7V)
Recommended Operating Conditions
Supply voltage
V
DD
, AV
DD
0, 3, XV
DD
1.7 to 2.7
V
AV
DD
1, 2, DV
DD
V
DD
to 2.7
V
Operating temperature Topr
20 to +75
C
I/O Pin Capacitance
Input capacitance
C
I
7 (max.)
pF
Output capacitance
C
O
7 (max.)
pF
Note) Measurement conditions
V
DD
= V
I
= 0V
f
M
= 1MHz
2
CXD3048R
Block Diagram
A0 to A11
D0 to D3
XEMP
XWIH
XQOK
BCK
LRCK
DOUT
PCMD
XRST
TEST
TES1
D/A
Interface
EFM
demodulator
Error
Corrector
32K
RAM
Sub Code
Processor
Clock
Generator
Asymmetry
Corrector
Digital
PLL
CPU
Interface
C2PO
WFCK
EMPH
GFS
XUGF
XT
AI
RFAC
ASYI
ASYO
BIAS
FILO
FILI
PCO
CLTV
MDP
PWMI
SENS
DATA
XLAT
CLOK
SCOR
SBSO
EXCK
WDCK
XT
A
O
VPCO
VCTL
XPCK
SQSO
SQCK
Digital
CLV
SERVO
Interface
ATSK
SCLK
SSTP
MIRR
DFCT
FOK
MIRR
DFCT
FOK
SERVO DSP
FOCUS SERVO
TRACKING
SERVO
SLED SERVO
PWM GENERATOR
FOCUS PWM
GENERATOR
TRACKING PWM
GENERATOR
SLED PWM
GENERATOR
FFDR
FRDR
TFDR
TRDR
SFDR
SRDR
RFDC
CE
TE
SE
FE
VC
IGEN
OPAmp
Analog SW
A/D
Converter
COUT
XRAS
XWE
XCAS
XWRE
XRDE
Selector
Digital
OUT
XTSL
Servo
Auto
Sequencer
XSOE
SYSM
LRMU
LRCKI
BCKI
PCMDI
LPF
AOUT1
VREFL
LPF
AOUT2
VREFR
DAC
HPL
HPR
Signal
Processor
Block
Servo Block
Memory Controller,
Bass Boost Block
Shock-proof
Memory
Controller +
Compression/
Expansion
TEST1 to 4
3
CXD3048R
Pin Configuration
36
35
34
31
32
33
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1
40
39
38
37
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
70 69 68 67
63
64
65
66
61
62
71
72
97
96
95
94
91
92
93
99
98
73
74
81
82
83
84
75
76
77
78
88 87 86 85
79
80
89
90
TE
CE
RF
A
C
AV
DD
3
BIAS
ASYI
AV
SS
3
VPCO
VCTL
CL
TV
FILO
FILI
PCO
V
DD
1
GFS
C2PO
COUT
MIRR
FOK
DFCT
A
TSK
DOUT
AV
DD
0
ASY
O
XUGF
LRMU
XRAS
XWE
D1
TEST1
TEST2
XCAS
WFCK
A9
A8
A7
DV
SS
A6
A5
A4
XRDE
V
DD
0
CLOK
D
ATA
SENS
XLA
T
XSOE
SYSM
WDCK
SCOR
XRST
XQOK
D3
D2
D0
PWMI
HPL
HV
SS
XTSL
EXCK
SBSO
XWIH
XEMP
SCLK
SQCK
V
SS
0
R4M
XWRE
VREFR
AV
SS
2
AV
SS
1
VREFL
AOUT1
AV
DD
1
XV
SS
XTAO
XTAI
XV
DD
HV
DD
HPR
TES1
AV
DD
2
AOUT2
SQSO
TEST
V
SS
1
XPCK
AV
SS
0
IGEN
RFDC
PCMD
PCMDI
BCK
BCKI
DV
DD
A3
A2
A0
A10
A11
TEST3
TEST4
FFDR
TRDR
TFDR
SRDR
SFDR
SSTP
MDS
MDP
C176
V
DD
2
LRCKI
VC
V
SS
2
FRDR
A1
FE
SE
LRCK
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
4
CXD3048R
Pin Description
Pin
No.
Symbol
I/O
Description
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
XRAS
XWE
D1
D0
D3
D2
TEST1
TEST2
XCAS
WFCK
A9
A8
A7
DV
SS
A6
A5
A4
XRDE
V
DD
0
CLOK
DATA
SENS
XLAT
XSOE
SYSM
WDCK
SCOR
XRST
PWMI
XQOK
XWRE
O
O
I/O
I/O
I/O
I/O
O
O
O
O
O
O
O
--
O
O
O
I/O
--
I
I
O
I
I
I
O
O
I
I
I/O
I/O
DRAM row address strobe signal.
DRAM data input enable signal.
DRAM data bus 1.
DRAM data bus 0.
DRAM data bus 3.
DRAM data bus 2.
Test pin. Do not connect.
Test pin. Do not connect.
DRAM column address strobe signal.
WFCK output. XOE is output by switching with the command.
DRAM address 9.
DRAM address 8.
DRAM address 7.
DRAM interface GND.
DRAM address 6.
DRAM address 5.
DRAM address 4.
DRAM readout enable signal input. XRDE monitor is output by switching
with the command.
Digital power supply.
Serial data transfer clock input from CPU. SQSO and SENS readout
clocks are output by switching with the command.
Serial data input from CPU.
SENS output to CPU. SQSO data is output by switching with the
command.
Latch input from CPU. The serial data is latched at the falling edge. XLAT
which is low for 6s or more is enabled.
Clock input mode switching from CPU. Valid when $A4 ENXSOE = 1.
Mute input. Muted when high.
Word clock output f = 2Fs. GRSCOR is output by switching with the
command.
High output when the subcode sync is detected. SCOR, which is
interpolated in the IC, is output by switching with the command.
System reset. Reset when low.
Spindle motor external control input.
Subcode Q OK input. XQOK monitor is output by switching with the
command.
DRAM write enable signal input. XWRE monitor is output by switching
with the command.
Power
supply
Value
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
--
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
--
1, Z, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
DRAM
I/F
Digital
5
CXD3048R
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
R4M
Vss0
SQCK
SCLK
SQSO
XEMP
XWIH
SBSO
EXCK
XTSL
HV
SS
HPL
HPR
HV
DD
XV
DD
XTAI
XTAO
XV
SS
AV
DD
1
AOUT1
VREFL
AV
SS
1
AV
SS
2
VREFR
AOUT2
AV
DD
2
TES1
TEST
V
SS
1
LRMU
DOUT
ATSK
DFCT
FOK
O
--
I
I
O
O
O
O
I
I
--
O
O
--
I
O
--
O
O
--
--
O
O
--
I
I
--
O
O
I/O
I/O
I/O
Microcomputer clock output. R8M and C4M are output by switching with
the command.
Digital GND.
SQSO readout clock input.
SENS serial data readout clock input.
Subcode Q 80-bit and PCM peak and level data output. CD TEXT data
output.
DRAM readout prohibited signal.
Write to DRAM prohibited signal.
Subcode P to W serial output.
SBSO readout clock input.
Crystal selection input. Low when the crystal is 16.9344MHz; high when
the crystal is 33.8688MHz.
Headphone GND.
Lch headphone PDM output.
Rch headphone PDM output.
Headphone power supply.
Master clock power supply.
Crystal oscillation circuit input. The master clock is externally input from
this pin.
Crystal oscillation circuit output.
Master clock GND.
Analog power supply.
Lch analog output.
Lch reference voltage.
Analog GND.
Analog GND.
Rch reference voltage.
Rch analog output.
Analog power supply.
Test pin. Normally GND.
Test pin. Normally GND.
Digital GND.
OR signal output of Lch, Rch "0" detection flag (AND output) and SYSM.
Only "0" detection flag is output by switching with the command.
Digital Out output.
Anti-shock input/output.
Defect signal input/output.
Focus OK signal input/output.
1, 0
--
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
--
1, 0
1, 0
--
--
Analog
Analog
--
--
Analog
Analog
--
--
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
Digital
H/P
X'tal
Lch
Rch
Digital
Pin
No.
Symbol
I/O
Description
Power
supply
Value
6
CXD3048R
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
MIRR
COUT
C2PO
GFS
XUGF
XPCK
V
DD
1
PCO
FILI
FILO
CLTV
VCTL
VPCO
AV
SS
3
ASYO
ASYI
BIAS
AV
DD
3
RFAC
AV
DD
0
IGEN
AV
SS
0
RFDC
CE
TE
SE
FE
VC
V
SS
2
FRDR
FFDR
TRDR
TFDR
SRDR
SFDR
I/O
I/O
O
O
O
O
--
O
I
O
I
I
O
--
O
I
I
--
I
--
I
--
I
I
I
I
I
I
--
O
O
O
O
O
O
Mirror signal input/output.
Track number count signal input/output. SCOR is output by switching with
the command.
C2PO output. MNT3 and GTOP are output by switching with the
command.
GFS output. MNT2 and XROF are output by switching with the command.
XUGF output. MNT0, RFCK, C4M and QRCVD are output by switching
with the command.
XPCK output. MNT1, FSTO and GTOP are output by switching with the
command.
Digital power supply.
Master PLL charge pump output.
Master PLL filter input.
Master PLL (slave = digital PLL) filter output.
Multiplier VCO1 control voltage input.
Wide-band EFM PLL VCO2 control voltage input.
Wide-band EFM PLL charge pump output.
Analog GND.
EFM full-swing output (low = Vss, high = VDD).
Asymmetry comparator voltage input.
Asymmetry circuit constant current input.
Analog power supply.
EFM signal input.
Analog power supply.
Operational amplifier constant current input.
Analog GND.
RF signal input.
Center servo analog input or E input.
Tracking error signal input or F input.
Sled error signal input or B input.
Focus error signal input or A input.
Center voltage input.
Digital GND.
Focus drive output.
Focus drive output.
Tracking drive output.
Tracking drive output.
Sled drive output.
Sled drive output.
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
--
1, Z, 0
Analog
1, Z, 0
--
1, 0
--
--
--
--
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
ASYM
A/D
Digital
Pin
No.
Symbol
I/O
Description
Power
supply
Value
Digital
7
CXD3048R
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
SSTP
MDS
MDP
C176
V
DD
2
LRCK
LRCKI
PCMD
PCMDI
BCK
BCKI
DV
DD
A3
A2
A1
A0
A10
A11
TEST3
TEST4
I
O
O
O
--
O
I
O
I
O
I
--
O
O
O
O
O
I/O
O
O
Disc innermost detection signal input.
Spindle drive output.
Spindle motor servo control output.
176.4kHz output. 88.2kHz for quasi-double speed setting.
Low output when XRST = low.
Digital power supply.
D/A interface. LR clock output f = Fs.
D/A interface. LR clock input.
D/A interface. Serial data output. (two's complement, MSB first)
D/A interface. Serial data input. (two's complement, MSB first)
D/A interface. Bit clock output.
D/A interface. Bit clock input.
DRAM interface power supply.
DRAM address 3.
DRAM address 2.
DRAM address 1.
DRAM address 0.
DRAM address 10.
DRAM address 11. Write prohibition factor is input by switching with the
command.
Test pin. Do not connect.
Test pin. Do not connect.
1, Z, 0
1, Z, 0
1, 0
--
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
--
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
1, 0
Notes) PCMD is a MSB first, two's complement output.
GTOP is used to monitor the frame sync protection status. (High: sync protection window released.)
XUGF is the frame sync obtained from the EFM signal, and is negative pulse. It is the signal before
sync protection.
XPCK is the inverse of the EFM PLL clock. The PLL is designed so that the falling edge and the
EFM signal transition point coincide.
The GFS signal goes high when the frame sync and the insertion protection timing match.
RFCK is derived from the crystal accuracy, and has a cycle of 136s.
C2PO represents the data error status.
XROF is generated when the 32K RAM exceeds the 28 frame jitter margin.
C4M is a 4.2336MHz output that changes in CAV-W mode and variable pitch mode.
R8M is the 8.4672MHz output.
FSTO is the 2/3 frequency-division output of the XTAI pin.
SOUT is the serial data output inside the servo block.
SOCK is the serial data readout clock output inside the servo block.
XOLT is the serial data latch output inside the servo block.
DRAM
I/F
Pin
No.
Symbol
I/O
Description
Power
supply
Value
Digital
8
CXD3048R
Monitor Pin Output Combinations
MONSEL
0
0
0
0
0
1
SRO1
0
0
0
0
1
--
MTSL1
0
0
1
1
0
--
MTSL0
0
1
0
1
0
--
Command bit
Output data
XUGF
MNT0
RFCK
C4M
SOUT
QRCVD
XPCK
MNT1
XPCK
FSTO
SOCK
GTOP
GFS
MNT2
XROF
GFS
XOLT
GFS
C2PO
MNT3
GTOP
C2PO
C2PO
C2PO
COUT
COUT
COUT
COUT
COUT
SCOR
MIRR
MIRR
MIRR
MIRR
MIRR
--
--: don't care
9
CXD3048R
Electrical Characteristics
1. DC Characteristics
(V
DD
1 = 2.5 0.2V, V
DD
2 (logic) = 1.8 0.1V, DV
SS
= V
SS
= 0V, Topr = 20 to +75C)
V
V
V
V
V
V
A
A
A
A
1.7
V
SS
1.7
2.0
2.0
V
DD
0.5
0
10
10
40
10
Analog input
Schmitt input
I
OH
= 4mA
I
OL
= 4mA
I
OH
= 2mA
I
OL
= 2mA
I
OH
= 0.28mA
I
OL
= 0.36mA
V
IN
= V
SS
or
V
DD
V
IN
= V
SS
or
V
DD
V
IN
= 0.25V
DD
to 0.75V
DD
V
O
= V
SS
or
V
DD
0.4
0.7
V
DD
0.7
0.4
0.4
V
DD
0.4
10
10
40
10
Input voltage
(1)
Input voltage
(2)
Input voltage
(3)
Output
voltage (1)
Output
voltage (2)
Output
voltage (3)
Input leak current (1)
Input leak current (2)
Input leak current (3)
Tri-state output leak current
(when high impedance)
(V
DD
= AV
DD
= 2.5 0.2V, Vss = AVss = 0V, Topr = 20 to +75C)
High level input voltage
Low level input voltage
Input voltage
High level input voltage
Low level input voltage
Hysteresis
High level output voltage
Low level output voltage
High level output voltage
Low level output voltage
High level output voltage
Low level output voltage
1,
2,
3,
4
6,
7
5
2,
8,
10,
15
9
11
1,
3,
5,
6
2,
4
7
10
V
IH
(1)
V
IL
(1)
V
IN
(2)
Vt
+
Vt
Vt
+
Vt
V
OH
(1)
V
OL
(1)
V
OH
(2)
V
OL
(2)
V
OH
(3)
V
OL
(3)
I
I
(1)
I
I
(2)
I
I
(3)
I
OZ
V
V
V
A
A
1.7
1.7
2.0
10
10
Schmitt input
I
OH
= 4mA
I
OL
= 4mA
V
IN
= V
SS
or
V
DD
V
IN
= V
SS
or
V
DD
0.4
0.7
0.7
0.4
10
10
Input voltage
(1)
Input voltage
(2)
Output
voltage
Input leak current (1)
Input leak current (2)
Unit
Max.
Typ.
Min.
Conditions
Item
High level input voltage
Low level input voltage
High level input voltage
Low level input voltage
Hysteresis
High level output voltage
Low level output voltage
13,
15
14
12,
13
15
13
Applicable
pins
V
IH
V
IL
Vt
+
Vt
Vt
+
Vt
V
OH
V
OL
I
I
(1)
I
I
(2)
Unit
Max.
Typ.
Min.
Conditions
Item
Applicable
pins
10
CXD3048R
Applicable pins
1
TEST, TES1
2
COUT, MIRR, DFCT, FOK, XQOK, XWRE, ATSK
3
SYSM, DATA, XSOE, XTSL
4
SSTP, PWMI
5
SQCK, EXCK, XRST, CLOK, SCLK, XLAT
6
VCTL, FILI, CLTV, ASYI, IGEN, BIAS
7
RFDC, CE, TE, SE, FE, VC
8
XEMP, XWIH, SQSO, SBSO, XUGF, XPCK, GFS, C2PO, SCOR, WDCK, SFDR, SRDR, TFDR, TRDR,
FFDR, FRDR, ASYO, DOUT, C176
9
R4M
10
SENS, MDP, VPCO, PCO, MDS
11
FILO
12
A0 to A10, XRAS, XCAS, XWE, WFCK, LRCK, BCK, PCMD
13
D0 to D3, XRDE, A11
14
LRCKI, BCKI
15
PCMDI
16
HPL, HPR
V
V
V
V
V
V
A
A
A
A
0.65V
DD
V
SS
0.65V
DD
V
DD
0.4
0
V
DD
0.4
0
V
DD
0.5
0
10
10
40
10
Analog input
Schmitt input
I
OH
= 2.4mA
I
OL
= 2.4mA
I
OH
= 1.4mA
I
OL
= 1.4mA
I
OH
= 0.28mA
I
OL
= 0.36mA
V
IN
= V
SS
or
V
DD
V
IN
= V
SS
or
V
DD
V
IN
= 0.25V
DD
to 0.75V
DD
V
O
= V
SS
or
V
DD
0.4
0.35V
DD
V
DD
0.35V
DD
V
DD
0.4
V
DD
0.4
V
DD
0.4
10
10
40
10
Input voltage
(1)
Input voltage
(2)
Input voltage
(3)
Output
voltage (1)
Output
voltage (2)
Output
voltage (3)
Input leak current (1)
Input leak current (2)
Input leak current (3)
Tri-state output leak current
(when high impedance)
(V
DD
= AV
DD
= 1.8 0.1V, V
SS
= AV
SS
= 0V, Topr = 20 to +75C)
High level input voltage
Low level input voltage
Input voltage
High level input voltage
Low level input voltage
Hysteresis
High level output voltage
Low level output voltage
High level output voltage
Low level output voltage
High level output voltage
Low level output voltage
1,
2,
3,
4
6,
7
5
2,
8,
10,
16
9
11
1,
3,
5,
6
2,
4
7
10
V
IH
(1)
V
IL
(1)
V
IN
(2)
Vt
+
Vt
Vt
+
Vt
V
OH
(1)
V
OL
(1)
V
OH
(2)
V
OL
(2)
V
OH
(3)
V
OL
(3)
I
I
(1)
I
I
(2)
I
I
(3)
I
OZ
Unit
Max.
Typ.
Min.
Conditions
Item
Applicable
pins
11
CXD3048R
2. AC Characteristics
(1) XTAI pin
(a) When using self-excited oscillation
(V
DD
= AV
DD
= 1.8 0.1V and 2.5 0.2V, Vss = AVss = 0V, Topr = 20 to +75C)
Oscillation
frequency
Item
f
MAX
Symbol
7
Min.
Typ.
34
Max.
MHz
Unit
(b) When inputting pulses to XTAI pin
(V
DD
= AV
DD
= 1.8 0.1V and 2.5 0.2V, Vss = AVss = 0V, Topr = 20 to +75C)
High level pulse
width
Low level pulse
width
Pulse cycle
Input high level
Input low level
Rise time,
fall time
Item
t
WHX
t
WLX
t
CX
V
IHX
V
ILX
t
R
,
t
F
Symbol
13
13
26
0.7V
DD
Min.
Typ.
500
500
1000
0.2V
DD
10
Max.
ns
ns
ns
V
V
ns
Unit
t
R
t
F
t
WHX
t
WLX
t
CX
V
ILX
V
IHX
0.1
V
IHX
0.9
V
IHX
XTAI
V
DD
/2
Note) When the pulse is input to the XTAI pin, be sure to input it via the capacitor.
12
CXD3048R
(2) CLOK, DATA, XLAT, SQCK and EXCK pins
(V
DD
= AV
DD
= 1.8 0.1V and 2.5 0.2V, V
SS
= AV
SS
= 0V, Topr = 20 to +75C)
Clock frequency
Clock pulse width
Setup time
Hold time
Delay time
Latch pulse width
EXCK SQCK frequency
EXCK SQCK pulse width
COUT frequency (during input)
COUT pulse width (during input)
Item
f
CK
t
WCK
t
SU
t
H
t
D
t
WL
f
T
t
WT
f
T
t
WT
Symbol
750
300
300
300
750
750
7.5
Min.
Typ.
0.65
30000
30000
0.65
65
Max.
MHz
ns
ns
ns
ns
ns
MHz
ns
kHz
s
Unit
Only when $44 and $45 are executed.
t
WCK
t
WCK
1/f
CK
t
H
t
SU
t
WL
t
D
1/f
T
t
WT
t
WT
t
H
t
SU
CLOK
DATA
XLAT
EXCK
SQCK
COUT
SBSO
SQSO
t
WSC
(3) R4M pin (when $A4X CKOUTSL2 = CKOUTSL1 = 0)
(V
DD
= AV
DD
= 1.8 0.1V and 2.5 0.2V, V
SS
= AV
SS
= 0V, Topr = 20 to +75C)
Output frequency
Output duty
Output amplitude
Item
f
OUT
D
OUT
V
OUT
Symbol
4.2336
50
V
DD
Min.
Typ.
Max.
MHz
%
V
Unit
13
CXD3048R
(4) SCLK pin
t
SPW
t
DLS
1/f
SCLK
MSB
LSB
. . .
. . .
XLAT
SCLK
Serial Read Out Data
(SENS)
(V
DD
= AV
DD
= 1.8 0.1V and 2.5 0.2V, V
SS
= AV
SS
= 0V, Topr = 20 to +75C)
SCLK frequency
SCLK pulse width
Delay time
Item
f
SCLK
t
SPW
t
DLS
Symbol
16
Min.
Typ.
Max.
MHz
ns
s
Unit
31.3
15
(5) COUT, MIRR and DFCT pins
Operating frequency
(V
DD
= AV
DD
= 1.8 0.1V and 2.5 0.2V, V
SS
= AV
SS
= 0V, Topr = 20 to +75C)
COUT maximum
operating frequency
MIRR maximum
operating frequency
DFCT maximum
operating frequency
Item
f
COUT
f
MIRR
f
DFCTH
Symbol
40
40
5
Min.
Typ.
Max.
kHz
kHz
kHz
Unit
1
2
3
Conditions
1
When using a high-speed traverse TZC.
2
When the RF signal continuously satisfies the following conditions during the above traverse.
A = 0.11V
DD
to 0.23V
DD
25%
3
During complete RF signal omission.
When settings related to DFCT signal generation are Typ.
A
B
B
A + B
14
CXD3048R
1-bit DAC and LPF Block Analog Characteristics
(V
DD
= AV
DD
= 2.6V, V
SS
= AV
SS
= 0V, Ta = +25C)
Total harmonic
distortion
Signal-to-noise
ratio
Item
Crystal
0.016
0.016
Min.
Typ.
Max.
%
dB
Unit
92
92
384Fs
768Fs
384Fs
768Fs
THD
S/N
Symbol
1kHz sine wave, 0dB data,
20kHz LPF
1kHz sine wave, 0dB data,
AMUT OFF (Using A-weighting
filter 20kHz LPF)
Conditions
0.009
0.009
94
94
Fs = 44.1kHz in all cases.
The total harmonic distortion and signal-to-noise ratio measurement circuits are shown below.
LPF external circuit diagram ($A560C400 PDMSEL = 1)
Audio Analyzer
CXD3048R
Rch
A
Lch
B
DATA
RF
TEST DISC
768Fs/384Fs
Block diagram of analog characteristics measurement
(V
DD
= AV
DD
= 2.6V, V
SS
= AV
SS
= 0V, Ta = +25C)
Output voltage
Load resistance
VREF pin capacitance
Item
V
OUT
R
L
C
VREF
Symbol
640
10
Min.
Typ.
Max.
mVrms
k
F
Unit
1
1
2
Applicable pins
658
1
Measurement is conducted for the above circuit diagrams with the sine wave output of 1kHz and 0dB.
Applicable pins
1
AOUT1, AOUT2
2
VREFL, VREFR
22F
AOUT1 (2)
VREFL (R)
1F
100
2200pF
100k
Audio Analyzer
15
CXD3048R
Contents
[1] CPU Interface
1-1. CPU Interface Timing ...................................................................................................................... 16
1-2. CPU Interface Command Table ...................................................................................................... 16
1-3. CPU Command Presets ................................................................................................................. 32
1-4. Description of SENS Signals .......................................................................................................... 43
1-5. Description of Commands .............................................................................................................. 45
[2] Subcode Interface
2-1. P to W Subcode Readout ............................................................................................................. 101
2-2. 80-bit Subcode-Q Readout ........................................................................................................... 101
[3] Description of Modes
3-1. CLV-N Mode .................................................................................................................................. 108
3-2. CLV-W Mode ................................................................................................................................. 108
3-3. CAV-W Mode ................................................................................................................................. 108
3-4. VCO-C Mode ................................................................................................................................ 109
[4] Description of Other Functions
4-1. Channel Clock Recovery by Digital PLL Circuit ........................................................................... 112
4-2. Frame Sync Protection ................................................................................................................. 114
4-3. Error Correction ............................................................................................................................ 114
4-4. DA Interface .................................................................................................................................. 115
4-5. Digital Out ..................................................................................................................................... 118
4-6. Servo Auto Sequence ................................................................................................................... 124
4-7. Digital CLV .................................................................................................................................... 132
4-8. CD-DSP Block Playback Speed ................................................................................................... 133
4-9. Description of DAC Block and Shock-proof Memory Controller Block Circuits ............................ 133
4-10. DAC Block Input Timing ................................................................................................................ 134
4-11. Description of DAC Block Functions ............................................................................................. 135
4-12. LPF Block ...................................................................................................................................... 140
4-13. Description of Shock-proof Memory Controller Block Functions .................................................. 141
4-14. CPU to DRAM Access Function ................................................................................................... 146
4-15. Asymmetry Correction .................................................................................................................. 150
4-16. CD TEXT Data Demodulation ....................................................................................................... 151
[5] Description of Servo Signal Processing System Functions and Commands
5-1. General Description of Servo Signal Processing System ............................................................ 153
5-2. Digital Servo Block Master Clock (MCK) ...................................................................................... 154
5-3. DC Offset Cancel [AVRG Measurement and Compensation] ...................................................... 155
5-4. E:F Balance Adjustment Function ................................................................................................ 156
5-5. FCS Bias Adjustment Function ..................................................................................................... 156
5-6. AGCNTL Function ......................................................................................................................... 158
5-7. FCS Servo and FCS Search ........................................................................................................ 160
5-8. TRK and SLD Servo Control ........................................................................................................ 161
5-9. MIRR and DFCT Signal Generation ............................................................................................. 162
5-10. DFCT Countermeasure Circuit ..................................................................................................... 163
5-11. Anti-shock Circuit .......................................................................................................................... 163
5-12. Brake Circuit ................................................................................................................................. 164
5-13. COUT Signal ................................................................................................................................. 165
5-14. Serial Readout Circuit ................................................................................................................... 165
5-15. Writing to Coefficient RAM ........................................................................................................... 166
5-16. PWM Output ................................................................................................................................. 166
5-17. Servo Status Changes Produced by LOCK Signal ...................................................................... 167
5-18. Description of Commands and Data Sets .................................................................................... 167
5-19. List of Servo Filter Coefficients ..................................................................................................... 195
5-20. Filter Composition ......................................................................................................................... 197
5-21. TRACKING and FOCUS Frequency Response ........................................................................... 203
[6] Application Circuit .................................................................................................................................. 204
Explanation of abbreviations
AVRG: Average
AGCNTL: Auto gain control
FCS: Focus
TRK: Tracking
SLD: Sled
DFCT: Defect
16
CXD3048R
[1] CPU Interface
1-1. CPU Interface Timing
CPU interface
This interface uses DATA, CLOK and XLAT to set the modes.
The interface timing chart is shown below. (See 2. AC Characteristics in Electrical Characteristics, for the
details of the AC characteristics.)
750ns to 30s
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
750ns or more
(6s or more
when $AAX
MLAT ON)
Valid
CLOK
DATA
XLAT
Registers
D0
D1
The internal registers are initialized by a reset when XRST = 0.
1-2. CPU Interface Command Table
Total bit length for each register
0 to 2
3
4 to 6
7
8
9
A
B
C
D
E
Register
8 bits
8 to 24 bits
16 bits
20 bits
32 bits
32 bits
32 bits
28 bits
28 bits
28 bits
20 bits
Total bit length
17
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Address
D23 to D20
Data 1
D19
D18
D17
D16
Data 2
D15
D14
D13
D12
Data 3
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 4
D7
D6
D5
D4
Data 5
D3
D2
D1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
1
--
--
--
--
0
--
1
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
1
1
1
--
--
--
--
0
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
1
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
FOCUS
CONTROL
0 0 0 0
1
TRACKING
CONTROL
0 0 0 1
Command Table ($0X to 1X)
--: don't care
D0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
FOCUS SERVO ON
(FOCUS GAIN
NORMAL)
FOCUS SERVO ON
(FOCUS GAIN
DOWN)
FOCUS SERVO OFF,
0V OUT
FOCUS SERVO OFF,
FOCUS SEARCH
VOLTAGE OUT
FOCUS SEARCH
VOLTAGE DOWN
FOCUS SEARCH
VOLTAGE UP
ANTI SHOCK ON
ANTI SHOCK OFF
BRAKE ON
BRAKE OFF
TRACKING GAIN
NORMAL
TRACKING GAIN UP
TRACKING GAIN UP
FILTER SELECT 1
TRACKING GAIN UP
FILTER SELECT 2
18
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Address
D23 to D20
Data 1
D19
D18
D17
D16
Data 2
D15
D14
D13
D12
Data 3
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 4
D7
D6
D5
D4
Data 5
D3
D2
D1
0
0
1
1
--
--
--
--
0
1
0
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
0
1
1
--
--
--
--
0
1
0
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
2
TRACKING
CONTROL
0 0 1 0
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
Command Table ($2X to 3X)
Regis-
ter
Command
Address
D23 to D20
Data 1
D19
D18
D17
D16
Data 2
D15
D14
D13
D12
Data 3
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 4
D7
D6
D5
D4
Data 5
D3
D2
D1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
D0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
TRACKING SERVO
OFF
TRACKING SERVO
ON
FORWARD TRACK
JUMP
REVERSE TRACK
JUMP
SLED SERVO OFF
SLED SERVO ON
FORWARD SLED
MOVE
REVERSE SLED
MOVE
SLED KICK LEVEL
(1
basic value) (default)
SLED KICK LEVEL
(2
basic value)
SLED KICK LEVEL
(3
basic value)
SLED KICK LEVEL
(4
basic value)
D0
--
--
--
--
--: don't care
19
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Address 1
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12
Address 4
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 1
D7
D6
D5
D4
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
KRAM DATA (K00)
SLED INPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K01)
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
KRAM DATA (K02)
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
KRAM DATA (K03)
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K04)
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
KRAM DATA (K05)
SLED OUTPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K06)
FOCUS INPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K07)
SLED AUTO GAIN
KRAM DATA (K08)
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K09)
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K0A)
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
KRAM DATA (K0B)
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
KRAM DATA (K0C)
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K0D)
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
KRAM DATA (K0E)
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K0F)
FOCUS DEFECT HOLD GAIN
Command Table ($340X)
Address 2
Address 3
0 1 0 0
0 0 0 0
20
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Address 1
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12
Address 4
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 1
D7
D6
D5
D4
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
KRAM DATA (K10)
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K11)
FOCUS OUTPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K12)
ANTI SHOCK INPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K13)
FOCUS AUTO GAIN
KRAM DATA (K14)
HPTZC / AUTO GAIN HIGH PASS FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K15)
HPTZC / AUTO GAIN HIGH PASS FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K16)
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K17)
HPTZC / AUTO GAIN LOW PASS FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K18)
FIX
KRAM DATA (K19)
TRACKING INPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K1A)
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K1B)
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K1C)
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
KRAM DATA (K1D)
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
KRAM DATA (K1E)
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K1F)
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
Command Table ($341X)
Address 2
Address 3
0 1 0 0
0 0 0 1
21
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Address 1
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12
Address 4
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 1
D7
D6
D5
D4
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
KRAM DATA (K20)
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K21)
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K22)
TRACKING OUTPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K23)
TRACKING AUTO GAIN
KRAM DATA (K24)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K25)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K26)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
KRAM DATA (K27)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
KRAM DATA (K28)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K29)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
KRAM DATA (K2A)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K2B)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN DEFECT HOLD GAIN
KRAM DATA (K2C)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K2D)
FOCUS GAIN DOWN OUTPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K2E)
Not used
KRAM DATA (K2F)
Not used
Command Table ($342X)
Address 2
Address 3
0 1 0 0
0 0 1 0
22
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Address 1
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12
Address 4
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 1
D7
D6
D5
D4
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
KRAM DATA (K30)
SLED INPUT GAIN (when TGup2 is accessed with SFSK = 1)
KRAM DATA (K31)
ANTI SHOCK LOW PASS FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K32)
Not used
KRAM DATA (K33)
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K34)
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-L
KRAM DATA (K35)
ANTI SHOCK FILTER COMPARATE GAIN
KRAM DATA (K36)
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K37)
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K38)
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
KRAM DATA (K39)
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
KRAM DATA (K3A)
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K3B)
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
KRAM DATA (K3C)
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
KRAM DATA (K3D)
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
KRAM DATA (K3E)
TRACKING GAIN UP OUTPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K3F)
Not used
Command Table ($343X)
Address 2
Address 3
0 1 0 0
0 0 1 1
23
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Address 1
D23 to D20 D19 to D16 D15 to D12
Address 4
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 1
D7
D6
D5
D4
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD7
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD6
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD5
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD4
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD3
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD2
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD1
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
KD0
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
KRAM DATA (K40)
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K41)
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-H
KRAM DATA (K42)
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-L
KRAM DATA (K43)
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K44)
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-L
KRAM DATA (K45)
TRACKING HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K46)
TRACKING HOLD INPUT GAIN (when TGup2 is accessed with THSK = 1)
KRAM DATA (K47)
Not used
KRAM DATA (K48)
FOCUS HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K49)
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-H
KRAM DATA (K4A)
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-L
KRAM DATA (K4B)
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-H
KRAM DATA (K4C)
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-L
KRAM DATA (K4D)
FOCUS HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN
KRAM DATA (K4E)
Not used
KRAM DATA (K4F)
Not used
Command Table ($344X)
Address 2
Address 3
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 0
24
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Address 1
D23 to D20
Data 1
D19 to D16 D15
D14
Data 2
D13
D12
D11
D10
Data 3
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
PGFS
1
A/D
SEL
SFBK
1
THB
ON
IDF
SL3
PGFS
0
COPY
EN
SFBK
2
FHB
ON
IDF
SL2
PFOK
1
EMPH
D
0
TLB1
ON
IDF
SL1
PFOK
0
CAT
b8
0
FLB1
ON
IDF
SL0
0
DOUT
EN1
LB1
SN
TLB2
ON
0
0
DOUT
DMUT
LB2
SN
0
DF
SLS
0
DOUT
WOD
LB2
SM
HBST
1
IDFT
1
MRS
WIN
EN
0
HBST
0
IDFT
0
MRT1
DOUT
EN2
0
LB1S
1
0
MRT0
0
0
LB1S
0
0
0
0
0
LB2S
1
LPDF
0
0
0
0
LB2S
0
INV
RFDC
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
Command Table ($348X to 3FX)
Address 3
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
FBL9
FB9
TV9
FBL8
FB8
TV8
FBL7
FB7
TV7
FBL6
FB6
TV6
FBL5
FB5
TV5
FBL4
FB4
TV4
FBL3
FB3
TV3
FBL2
FB2
TV2
FBL1
FB1
TV1
--
--
TV0
FCS Bias Limit
FCS Bias Data
Traverse Center Data
D0
PGFS, PFOK, RFAC
DOUT
Booster Surf Brake
Booster
DFCT
Address 2
Address 3
0 1 0 0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
--: don't care
25
CXD3048R
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
FT1
TDZC
FZSH
VCLM
DAC
0
1
1
1
SFO2
COSS
SFID
F1NM
0
FT0
DTZC
FZSL
VCLC
SD6
FBON
0
0
1
SFO1
COTS
SFSK
F1DM
AGG4
FS5
TJ5
SM5
FLM
SD5
FBSS
0
0
1
SDF2
CETZ
THID
F3NM
XT4D
FS4
TJ4
SM4
FLC0
SD4
FBUP
0
1
1
SDF1
CETF
THSK
F3DM
XT2D
FS3
TJ3
SM3
RFLM
SD3
FBV1
FPG
S1
0
1
MAX2
COT2
ABEF
T1NM
0
FS2
TJ2
SM2
RFLC
SD2
FBV0
FPG
S0
0
1
MAX1
COT1
TLD2
T1UM
DRR2
FS1
TJ1
SM1
AGF
SD1
FIF
ZC
TPG
S1
0
1
SFOX
MOT2
TLD1
T3NM
DRR1
FS0
TJ0
SM0
AGT
SD0
TJD0
TPG
S0
0
1
BTF
0
TLD0
T3UM
DRR0
FTZ
SFJP
AGS
DFSW
0
FPS1
0
UD
FZC
0
D2V2
BTS1
SDF6
DFIS
0
FG6
TG6
AGJ
LKSW
0
FPS0
0
0
0
D2V1
BTS0
SDF5
TLCD
ASFG
FG5
TG5
AGGF
TBLM
0
TPS1
0
0
0
D1V2
MRC1
SDF4
0
FTQ
FG4
TG4
AGGT
TCLM
0
TPS0
0
0
0
D1V1
MRC0
SDF3
LKIN
1
FG3
TG3
AGV1
FLC1
0
SVDA
0
0
SRQ1
RINT
0
0
COIN
SRO1
FG2
TG2
AGV2
TLC2
0
SJHD
0
0
SRQ0
0
0
0
MDFI
0
FG1
TG1
AGHS
TLC1
0
INBK
0
0
0
0
0
0
MIRI
AGHF
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
Command Table ($34FX to 3FX) cont.
FG0
TG0
AGHT
TLC0
0
MTI0
0
0
0
0
0
0
XT1D
ASOT
FCS search, AGF
TRK jump, AGT
FZC, AGC, SLD move
DC measure, cancel
Serial data readout
FCS Bias, Gain,
Surf jump / brake
Gain
FOCUS
ASYO
Mirr, DFCT, FOK
TZC, COUT, Bottom,
MIRR
SLD filter
Filter
Clock, others
Regis-
ter
Command
Address 1
D23 to D20
Address 2
D19
D18
D17
D16
Data 1
D15
D14
D13
D12
Data 2
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 3
D7
D6
D5
D4
Data 4
D3
D2
D1
D0
26
CXD3048R
Command Table ($34FX to 3FX) cont.
Regis-
ter
Command
Address 1
D23 to D20
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
Address 2
D19
D18
D17
D16
Address 3
D15
D14
D13
D12
Data 1
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 2
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
SYG3
FSUD
SYG2
FFS
UP
SYG1
0
SYG0
1
FI
FZB3
0
FI
FZB2
0
FI
FZB1
FFS5
FI
FZB0
FFS4
FI
FZA3
FFS3
FI
FZA2
FFS2
FI
FZA1
FFS1
D0
FI
FZA0
FFS0
Data 3
System GAIN
FOCUS
27
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Command Table ($4X to EX)
Address
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 1
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 3
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
AS3
TR3
SD3
32768
CD-
ROM
1
AS2
TR2
SD2
16384
DOUT
Mute
DSPB
ON-OFF
AS1
TR1
SD1
8192
DOUT
Mute-F
ASEQ
ON-OFF
AS0
TR0
SD0
4096
WSEL
1
MT3
0
KF3
2048
VCO
SEL2
BiliGL
MAIN
MT2
0
KF2
1024
ASHS
BiliGL
SUB
MT1
0
KF1
512
SOCT0
FLFC
MT0
0
KF0
256
VCO
SEL1
0
LSSL
0
0
128
KSL3
0
0
0
0
64
KSL2
0
0
0
0
32
KSL1
0
0
0
0
16
KSL0
0
Auto sequence
Blind (A, E),
Brake (B),
Overflow (C, G)
Sled KICK,
BRAKE (D),
KICK (F)
Auto sequence (N)
track jump
count setting
MODE
specification
Function
specification
4
5
6
7
8
9
Data 4
D3
D2
D1
--
--
--
8
0
1
--
--
--
4
VCO1
CS0
0
--
--
--
2
0
0
D0
--
--
--
1
0
1
--: don't care
28
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Command Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Address
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 1
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 3
D3
D2
D1
D0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
Mute
0
0
1
1
0
0
ATT
0
1
0
1
0
1
PCT1
RSL1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
SL
XQOK
XQOK
SubQA3
1
1
PCT2
RSL0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
SL
XWRE
XWRE
SubQA2
1
1
0
0
1
PWDN
BBON1
COMP
ON
1
PWDN
BBON1
COMP
ON
GTOP
CHECK
XRDE
SubQA1
1
1
SOC2
0
ZMUTA
ZDPL
BBON0
0
0
ZDPL
BBON0
0
NOLIM
WDCK
XSOEO
SubQA0
0
1
0
DTSL1
SMUT
WOC
HBON1
0
SMUT
XWOC
HBON1
0
SPSL
COM
XSOEO2
0
1
DADR19
0
DTSL0
AD10
DAC
EMPH
HBON0
0
AD10
DAC
EMPH
HBON0
0
READ2
ADDRST
0
DRWR
DADR18
0
MCSL1
AD9
HiCut
FILTER
BBSL1
0
AD9
HiCut
FILTER
BBSL1
0
REFSEL
0
0
DRADR
DADR17
0
MCSL0
AD8
BST
CL
BBSL0
0
AD8
BST
CL
BBSL0
0
REFON
SDTO
OUT
0
0
DADR16
A
Audio CTRL
Signal select
Bass boost
Headphone
Shock-proof
memory setting
Shock-proof
memory control
DOUT subcode-Q
setting
DRAM I/F
Data 4
D3
D2
D1
0
0
AD7
1
HBSL1
0
AD7
1
HBSL1
0
XOE
OUT
SubQD7
DRD15
DADR15
1
SDSL2
AD6
PDM
SEL
HBSL0
0
AD6
PDM
SEL
HBSL0
0
MSL2
SubQD6
DRD14
DADR14
0
SDSL1
AD5
OBIT1
BBST
Vdwn1
1
AD5
1
BBST
Vdwn1
1
MSL1
SubQD5
DRD13
DADR13
D0
0
SDSL0
AD4
OBIT0
BBST
Vdwn0
0
AD4
0
BBST
Vdwn0
0
MSL0
SubQD4
DRD12
DADR12
29
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Command Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Address
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 1
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 3
D3
D2
D1
D0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
32768
Gain
MDP1
0
CM3
0
0
1
1
1
1
16384
Gain
MDP0
TB
CM2
1
1
0
0
1
1
8192
Gain
MDS1
TP
CM1
0
1
0
1
0
1
4096
Gain
MDS0
Gain
CLVS
CM0
ADPON
ARDTEN
AVW
ADCPS
VARI
ON
SYG3
EA
2048
Gain
DCLV1
VP7
EPWM
BITSL1
1
0
DSP
SLEEP
VARI
USE
SYG2
EA
1024
Gain
DCLV0
VP6
SPDC
BITSL0
1
SFP5
DSSP
SLEEP
WTC
C2PO
SYG1
EA
512
PCC1
VP5
ICAP
0
1
SFP4
ASYM
SLEEP
SCSY
(sub)
SYG0
EA
256
PCC0
VP4
SFSL
ADP
WO
1
SFP3
ESP
SLEEP
SENS
SEL3
MDP
OUTSL1
128
SFP3
VP3
VC2C
0
0
SFP2
LPF
SLEEP
SENS
SEL2
MDP
OUTSL0
64
SFP2
VP2
HIFC
0
1
SFP1
DSUB
SLEEP
SENS
SEL1
LPWR2
32
SFP1
VP1
LPWR
0
0
SFP0
ASEQ
SLEEP
SENS
SEL0
0
16
SFP0
VP0
VPON
A
B
C
D
E
Compression
setting
EFM playability
enhancement setting
Sync expansion
specification
Sleep setting
Variable pitch
setting
Spindle servo
setting
Traverse monitor
counter setting
Spindle servo
coefficient setting
CLV CTRL
SPD mode
Data 4
D3
D2
D1
0
0
0
PCOL
MDS
CTL
8
SRP3
VP
CTL1
Gain
CAV1
GRSEL
0
0
HCAV
SLEEP
MDP
UP
4
SRP2
VP
CTL0
Gain
CAV0
0
1
0
ERCNT
SLEEP
0
2
SPR1
0
0
D0
0
0
0
0
MDP
CTL4
1
SRP0
0
INV
VPCO
30
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Command Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Address
Data 1
Data 5
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 6
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 7
D3
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
ERC4
0
0
EN
XSOE
AD3
0
BBST
Vup1
0
AD3
0
BBST
Vup1
0
ADDRST
SEL
SubQD3
SCOR
SEL
0
0
CKOUT
SL2
AD2
1
BBST
Vup0
0
AD2
1
BBST
Vup0
0
ADRMO
SubQD2
SCSY
0
0
CKOUT
SL1
AD1
0
BBST
Uth
0
AD1
0
BBST
Uth
0
0
SubQD1
SOCT1
0
0
SLD
BBIN
AD0
0
BBST
Lth
PDM
INV
AD0
0
BBST
Lth
PDM
INV
STA
SEL
SubQD0
TXON
0
0
max
C2PO7
setup
XWI
H2
TXOUT
0
0
max
C2PO6
0
XWI
H1
OUTL1
0
0
max
C2PO5
0
SPSL
COM
OUTL0
0
0
max
C2PO4
0
WQR
MON
0
DIV4
--
max
C2PO3
A11
SEL
MODE
specification
Function
specification
AUDIO CTRL
Signal select
Bass boost
Headphone
Shock-proof
memory setting
DOUT subcode-Q
setting
0 0
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
1 0 0 1
0 0 1
0 1
1 0
1 1
0
0 0 1
0 1
1 0
1 1
0
0 0 0 0
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
8
9
A
D2
D1
0
0
--
max
C2PO2
READ
S2
OUTL2
0
--
max
C2PO1
READ
S1
D0
0
0
--
max
C2PO0
MON
SEL
--: don't care
31
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Command Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Address
Data 1
Data 5
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 6
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
DRD11
DADR11
ADPCM
SEL
1
REF
SEL2
MDP
CTL3
0
EDC7
0
DRD10
DADR10
ADPCM
MUTE
0
SLIM1
MDP
CTL2
0
EDC6
0
DRD9
DADR9
0
0
SLIM0
MDP
CTL1
MTSL1
EDC5
0
DRD8
DADR8
0
0
OV4
MDP
CTL0
MTSL0
EDC4
0
DRD7
DADR7
0
0
OV3
ASYE
EDC3
0
DRD6
DADR6
ORMU
0
OV2
MD2
EDC2
0
DRD5
DADR5
0
0
OV1
0
EDC1
0
DRD4
DADR4
0
0
OV0
0
EDC0
0
DRD3
DADR3
1
--
--
DRAM I/F
Compression
setting
EFM playability
enhancement
setting
Sync expansion
specification
Spindle servo
setting
Traverse monitor
counter setting
Spindle servo
coefficient setting
CLV CTRL
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
A
B
C
D
Data 7
D2
D1
DRD2
DADR2
0
--
--
DRD1
DADR1
0
--
--
D0
DRD0
DADR0
0
--
--
--: don't care
32
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Address
D23 to D20
Data 1
D19
D18
D17
D16
Data 2
D15
D14
D13
D12
Data 3
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 4
D7
D6
D5
D4
Data 5
D3
D2
D1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
1-3. CPU Command Presets
Command Preset Table ($0X to 34X)
Regis-
ter
Command
Address
D23 to D20
Data 1
D19
D18
D17
D16
Data 2
D15
D14
D13
D12
Data 3
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 4
D7
D6
D5
D4
Data 5
D3
D2
D1
0
0
0
0
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
FOCUS
CONTROL
TRACKING
CONTROL
TRACKING
MODE
0
1
2
0 0 1 1
Address 1
D23 to D20 D19
D18
D17
D16
Address 2
D15
D14
D13
D12
Address 3
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 1
D7
D6
D5
D4
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
0
1
0
0
0
See "Coefficient ROM Preset Values Table"
D0
--
--
--
FOCUS SERVO OFF,
0V OUT
TRACKING GAIN UP
FILTER SELECT 1
TRACKING SERVO OFF
SLED SERVO OFF
D0
--
SLED KICK LEVEL
(1
basic value) (default)
D0
KRAM DATA
($3400XX to $344FXX)
--: don't care
33
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Address 1
D23 to D20
Data 1
D19 to D16 D15
D14
Data 2
D13
D12
D11
D10
Data 3
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
Command Preset Table ($348X to 34FX)
Address 3
Data 1
Data 2
Data 3
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
--
--
0
FCS Bias Limit
FCS Bias Data
Traverse Center Data
D0
PGFS, PFOK, RFAC
DOUT
Booster Surf Brake
Booster
DFCT
Address 2
Address 3
0 1 0 0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
--: don't care
34
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Address 1
D23 to D20
Address 2
D19
D18
D17
D16
Data 1
D15
D14
D13
D12
Data 2
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 3
D7
D6
D5
D4
Data 4
D3
D2
D1
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
Command Preset Table ($34FX to 3FX) cont.
D0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
FCS search, AGF
TRK jump, AGT
FZC, AGC, SLD move
DC measure, cancel
Serial data read out
FCS Bias, Gain,
Surf jump / brake
Gain
FOCUS
ASYO
MIRR, DFCT, FOK
TZC, COUT, Bottom,
MIRR
SLD filter
Filter
Clock, others
35
CXD3048R
Command Preset Table ($34FX to 3FX) cont.
Regis-
ter
Command
Address 1
D23 to D20
3
SELECT
0 0 1 1
Address 2
D19
D18
D17
D16
Address 3
D15
D14
D13
D12
Data 1
D11
D10
D9
D8
Data 2
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D0
0
0
Data 3
System GAIN
FOCUS
36
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX)
Address
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 1
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 3
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
Auto sequence
Blind (A, E),
Brake (B),
Overflow (C, G)
Sled KICK,
BRAKE (D),
KICK (F)
Auto sequence (N)
track jump count
setting
MODE setting
Function
specification
4
5
6
7
8
9
D3
--
--
--
0
0
1
Data 4
D2
D1
--
--
--
0
0
0
--
--
--
0
0
0
D0
--
--
--
0
0
1
--: dun't care
37
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Address
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 1
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 3
D3
D2
D1
D0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
A
Audio CTRL
Signal select
Bass boost
Headphone
Shock-proof
memory setting
Shock-proof
memory control
DOUT subcode-Q
setting
DRAM I/F
Data 4
D3
D2
D1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
D0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
38
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Address
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 1
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 3
D3
D2
D1
D0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
A
B
C
D
E
Compression
setting
EFM playability
enhancement setting
Sync expansion
specification
Sleep setting
Variable pitch
setting
Spindle servo
setting
Traverse monitor
counter setting
Spindle servo
coefficient setting
CLV CTRL
SPD mode
Data 4
D3
D2
D1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
D0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
39
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Address
Data 1
Data 5
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 6
D3
D2
D1
D0
1 0 0 0
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
MODE
specification
Function
specification
AUDIO CTRL
Signal select
Bass boost
Headphone
Shock-proof
memory setting
0 0
0 1 0 0
0 1 0 1
0 1 1 0
0 1 1 1
0 0 1
0 1
1 0
1 1
0
0 0 1
0 1
1 0
1 1
0
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
8
9
A
Data 7
D3
D2
D1
0
0
--
0
0
0
0
--
0
0
0
0
--
0
0
D0
0
0
--
0
0
--: don't care
40
CXD3048R
Regis-
ter
Command
Command Preset Table ($4X to EX) cont.
Address
Data 1
Data 5
D3
D2
D1
D0
Data 6
D3
D2
D1
D0
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 0 1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
DOUT subcode-Q
setting
DRAM I/F
Compression
setting
EFM playability
enhancement
setting
Sync expansion
specification
Spindle servo
setting
Traverse monitor
counter setting
Spindle servo
coefficient setting
CLV CTRL
1 0 0 1
1 0 1 0
1 0 1 1
1 1 0 0
1 1 1 1
1 1 1 0
1 1 1 1
Data 2
Data 3
Data 4
A
B
C
D
0 0 0 0
Data 7
D3
D2
D1
0
0
1
--
--
0
0
0
--
--
0
0
0
--
--
D0
0
0
0
--
--
--: don't care
41
CXD3048R
(Coefficient ROM Preset Values Table (1))
ADDRESS
DATA
CONTENTS
K00
K01
K02
K03
K04
K05
K06
K07
K08
K09
K0A
K0B
K0C
K0D
K0E
K0F
K10
K11
K12
K13
K14
K15
K16
K17
K18
K19
K1A
K1B
K1C
K1D
K1E
K1F
K20
K21
K22
K23
K24
K25
K26
K27
K28
K29
K2A
K2B
K2C
K2D
K2E
K2F
E0
81
23
7F
6A
10
14
30
7F
46
81
1C
7F
58
82
7F
4E
32
20
30
80
77
80
77
00
F1
7F
3B
81
44
7F
5E
82
44
18
30
7F
46
81
3A
7F
66
82
44
4E
1B
00
00
SLED INPUT GAIN
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
SLED OUTPUT GAIN
FOCUS INPUT GAIN
SLED AUTO GAIN
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER A
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER B
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
FOCUS DEFECT HOLD GAIN
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
FOCUS OUTPUT GAIN
ANTI SHOCK INPUT GAIN
FOCUS AUTO GAIN
HPTZC / Auto Gain HIGH PASS FILTER A
HPTZC / Auto Gain HIGH PASS FILTER B
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER A
HPTZC / Auto Gain LOW PASS FILTER B
Fix
TRACKING INPUT GAIN
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER A
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER B
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
TRACKING OUTPUT GAIN
TRACKING AUTO GAIN
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER A
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER B
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
FOCUS GAIN DOWN DEFECT HOLD GAIN
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
FOCUS GAIN DOWN OUTPUT GAIN
Not used
Not used
Fix indicates that normal preset values should be used.
42
CXD3048R
<Coefficient ROM Preset Values Table (2)>
ADDRESS
DATA
CONTENTS
K30
K31
K32
K33
K34
K35
K36
K37
K38
K39
K3A
K3B
K3C
K3D
K3E
K3F
K40
K41
K42
K43
K44
K45
K46
K47
K48
K49
K4A
K4B
K4C
K4D
K4E
K4F
80
66
00
7F
6E
20
7F
3B
80
44
7F
77
86
0D
57
00
04
7F
7F
79
17
6D
00
00
02
7F
7F
79
17
54
00
00
SLED INPUT GAIN (Only when TRK gain up2 is accessed with SFSK = 1.)
ANTI SHOCK LOW PASS FILTER B
Not used
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-H
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-L
ANTI SHOCK FILTER COMPARATE GAIN
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER A
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER B
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
TRACKING GAIN UP OUTPUT GAIN
Not used
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-H
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-L
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-H
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-L
TRACKING HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
(Only when TRK gain up2 is accessed with THSK = 1.)
Not used
FOCUS HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-H
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-L
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-H
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-L
FOCUS HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN
Not used
Not used
43
CXD3048R
1-4. Description of SENS Signals
SENS output
Microcomputer
serial register
(latching not required)
ASEQ = 0
ASEQ = 1
$0X
$1X
$2X
$30 to $37
$38
$38
$39X
$3A
$3B to $3F
$4X
$5X
$6X
$A0 to $A8
$AA to $AF
$BX
$CX
$EX
$7X, 8X, 9X, DX, FX
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
Z
GFS
COMP
COUT
OV64
Z
FZC
AS
TZC
SSTP
AGOK
XAVEBSY
See 5-18. Description of Commands and Data
Sets "$39".
FBIAS Count STOP
SSTP
XBUSY
FOK
0
GFS
COMP
COUT
OV64
0
Output data length
--
--
--
--
--
--
8 to 16 bits
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
$38 outputs AGOK during AGT and AGF command settings, and XAVEBSY during AVRG measurement.
SSTP is output in all other cases.
44
CXD3048R
Description of SENS Signals
SENS output
Z
XBUSY
FOK
GFS
COMP
COUT
OV64
The SENS pin is high impedance.
Low while the auto sequencer is in operation, high when operation terminates.
Outputs the same signal as the FOK pin.
High for "focus OK".
High when the regenerated frame sync is obtained with the correct timing.
Counts the number of tracks set with Reg.B.
High when Reg.B is latched, low when COUT is counted for the initial Reg.B number.
Counts the number of tracks set with Reg.B.
High when Reg.B is latched, toggles each time COUT is counted for the Reg.B number.
While $44 and $45 are being executed, toggles with each COUT 8-count instead of the
Reg.B number.
Low when the EFM signal is lengthened by 64 channel clock pulses or more after passing
through the sync detection filter.
45
CXD3048R
1-5. Description of Commands
The meaning of the data for each address on the XLAT pin side is explained below.
$4X commands
Register name
4
Command
Data 1
MAX timer value
Data 2
Timer range
Data 3
AS3
AS2
AS1
AS0
MT3
MT2
MT1
MT0
LSSL
0
0
0
Command
Cancel
Fine Search
Focus-On
1 Track Jump
10 Track Jump
2N Track Jump
M Track Move
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
AS3
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
AS2
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
AS1
0
RXF
1
RXF
RXF
RXF
RXF
AS0
RXF = 0 Forward
RXF = 1 Reverse
When the Focus-on command ($47) is canceled, $02 is sent and the auto sequence is interrupted.
When the Track jump commands ($44, $45 and $48 to $4D) are canceled, $25 is sent and the auto sequence
is interrupted.
MAX timer value
MT3
23.2ms
1.49s
Timer range
MT2
11.6ms
0.74s
MT1
5.8ms
0.37s
MT0
2.9ms
0.18s
LSSL
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
To disable the MAX timer, set the MAX timer value to "0".
$5X commands
Timer
Blind (A, E), Overflow (C, G)
Brake (B)
0.18ms
0.36ms
TR3
0.09ms
0.18ms
TR2
0.045ms
0.09ms
TR1
0.022ms
0.045ms
TR0
46
CXD3048R
$6X commands
Register name
6
KICK (D)
Data 1
KICK (F)
Data 2
SD3
SD2
SD1
SD0
KF3
KF2
KF1
KF0
Timer
When executing KICK (D) $44 or $45
When executing KICK (D) $4C or $4D
23.2ms
11.6ms
SD3
11.6ms
5.8ms
SD2
5.8ms
2.9ms
SD1
2.9ms
1.45ms
SD0
Timer
KICK (F)
0.72ms
KF3
0.36ms
KF2
0.18ms
KF1
0.09ms
KF0
Command
Auto sequence track
jump count setting
$7X commands
Auto sequence track jump count setting
D3
2
15
Data 1
D2
2
14
D1
2
13
D0
2
12
D3
2
11
Data 2
D2
2
10
D1
2
9
D0
2
8
D3
2
7
Data 3
D2
2
6
D1
2
5
D0
2
4
D3
2
3
Data 4
D2
2
2
D1
2
1
D0
2
0
This command is used to set N when a 2N-track jump is executed, to set M when an M-track move is
executed and to set the jump count when fine search is executed for auto sequencer.
The maximum track count is 65,535, but note that with a 2N-track jump the maximum track jump count
depends on the mechanical limitations of the optical system.
When the track jump count is from 0 to 15, the COUT signal is counted for 2N-track jumps and M-track
moves; when the count is 16 or over, the MIRR signal is counted. For fine search, the COUT signal is
counted.
47
CXD3048R
$8X commands
Command
MODE
specification
Data 1
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
D0
Command bit
CDROM = 1
CDROM = 0
CD-
ROM
DOUT
Mute
DOUT
Mute-F
WSEL
VCO
SEL2
ASHS SOCT0
VCO
SEL1
C2PO timing
1-3
1-3
Processing
CDROM mode; average value interpolation and pre-value hold are not
performed.
Audio mode; average value interpolation and pre-value hold are performed.
Command bit
DOUT Mute = 1
DOUT Mute = 0
Processing
When Digital Out is on ($B MD2 = 1), DOUT output is muted.
When Digital Out is on, DOUT output is not muted.
Command bit
DOUT Mute F = 1
DOUT Mute F = 0
Processing
When Digital Out is on ($B MD2 = 1), DA output is muted.
DA output mute is not affected when Digital Out is either on or off.
MD2
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
Other mute conditions
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
DOUT Mute
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
DOUT Mute F
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
DA output for 48-bit slot
0dB
dB
0dB
dB
0dB
dB
DOUT output
OFF
0dB
dB
See "Mute conditions" (1) to (5) under $AX commands for other mute conditions.
When $A4 DTSL1 = 1, the Digital Out from the bass boost or shock-proof is selected. See the description
of Digital Out.
48
CXD3048R
Command bit
WSEL = 1
WSEL = 0
Sync protection window width
26 channel clock
6 channel clock
Application
Anti-rolling is enhanced.
Sync window protection is enhanced.
In normal-speed playback, channel clock = 4.3218MHz.
Command bit
ASHS = 0
ASHS = 1
Function
The command transfer rate from the auto sequencer to the DSSP block is set to normal speed.
The command transfer rate from the auto sequencer to the DSSP block is set to half speed.
See "4-8. CD-DSP Block Playback Speed" for settings.
Command bit
SOCT0
Processing
Subcode-Q is output from the SQSO pin.
The spindle speed measurement result is output from the SQSO pin. Input the
readout clock to SQCK. (See Timing Chart 2-5.)
Various signals are output from the SQSO pin. Input the readout clock to SQCK.
(See Timing Chart 2-4.)
The error rate is output from the SQSO pin. Input the readout clock to SQCK.
(See Timing Chart 2-6.)
$8X command TXOUT = 0 and $A8X command SDTO OUT = 0 must be set.
SOCT1
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Command
MODE
specification
Data 2
Data 3
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
D0
VCO
SEL2
ASHS SOCT0
VCO
SEL1
KSL3
KSL2
KSL1
KSL0
See above.
Command bit
VCOSEL2 = 0
VCOSEL2 = 1
Processing
Multiplier PLL VCO2 is set to normal speed.
Multiplier PLL VCO2 is set to approximately twice the normal speed.
Command bit
KSL3
Processing
Output of multiplier PLL VCO1 selected by VCO1 CS0 is 1/1 frequency-divided.
Output of multiplier PLL VCO1 selected by VCO1 CS0 is 1/2 frequency-divided.
Output of multiplier PLL VCO1 selected by VCO1 CS0 is 1/4 frequency-divided.
Output of multiplier PLL VCO1 selected by VCO1 CS0 is 1/8 frequency-divided.
KSL2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
49
CXD3048R
Command bit
VCOSEL1 = 0
VCOSEL1 = 1
Processing
Wide-band PLL VCO1 is set to normal speed.
Wide-band PLL VCO1 is set to approximately twice the normal speed.
Command bit
KSL1
Processing
Output of wide-band PLL VCO2 is 1/1 frequency-divided.
Output of wide-band PLL VCO2 is 1/2 frequency-divided.
Output of wide-band PLL VCO2 is 1/4 frequency-divided.
Output of wide-band PLL VCO2 is 1/8 frequency-divided.
KSL0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Block Diagram of VCO Internal Path
Selector
1/2
1/1
1/8
1/4
Selector
To DSP interior
KSL3, 2
VCO1CS0
No.2 VCO1
VCO1SEL
No.1 VCO1
1/2
1/1
1/8
1/4
Selector
To DSP interior
KSL1, 0
VCO2
VCO2SEL
VCO1 internal path
VCO2 internal path
50
CXD3048R
Command
MODE
specification
Data 4
Data 5
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
VCO1
CS0
0
0
ERC4
SCOR
SEL
SCSY SOCT1
Data 6
D3
D2
D1
D0
TXON TXOUT OUTL1 OUTL0
See page 48.
The CXD3048R has two multiplier PLL VCO1s, and this command selects one of these VCO1s.
The two VCOs are No. 2 and No. 1 in order of the maximum frequency.
The block diagrams for VCO1 and VCO2 including VCOSEL1, VCOSEL2, KSL0 to KSL3 and VCO1CS0
shown on the previous page.
Command bit
VCO1CS0 = 0
VCO1CS0 = 1
Processing
Selects the No. 1 VCO1.
Selects the No. 2 VCO1.
$8X commands cont.
Command bit
ERC4 = 0
ERC4 = 1
Processing
C2 error double correction is performed when DSPB = 1.
C2 error quadruple correction is performed even when DSPB = 1.
Command bit
SCOR SEL = 0
SCOR SEL = 1
Processing
WDCK signal is output.
GRSCOR (protected SCOR) is output.
Used when outputting GRSCOR from the WDCK pin.
Command bit
SCSY = 0
SCSY = 1
Processing
No processing.
GRSCOR (protected SCOR) synchronization is applied again.
Used to resynchronize GRSCOR.
The rising edge signal of this command bit is used internally, so when resynchronizing GRSCOR, first return
the setting to "0" and then set to "1".
GRSCOR is the crystal accuracy SCOR signal obtained by removing the motor wow component.
This signal is synchronized with PCMDATA.
The resynchronization conditions are when GTOP = high.
Command bit
TXON = 0
TXON = 1
Processing
When CD TEXT data is not demodulated, set TXON to "0".
When CD TEXT data is demodulated, set TXON to "1".
See "4-16. CD TEXT Data Demodulation".
51
CXD3048R
Command bit
TXOUT = 0
TXOUT = 1
Processing
Various signals except for CD TEXT are output from the SQSO pin.
CD TEXT data is output from the SQSO pin.
See "4-16. CD TEXT Data Demodulation".
Command bit
OUTL1 = 0
OUTL1 = 1
Processing
WDCK and XPCK are output.
WDCK and XPCK outputs are set low.
Command bit
OUTL0 = 0
OUTL0 = 1
Processing
PCMD, BCK and LRCK are output.
PCMD, BCK and LRCK outputs are set low.
Command
MODE
specification
Data 7
D3
D2
D1
D0
Command bit
OUTL2 = 0
OUTL2 = 1
0
0
OUTL2
0
Processing
WFCK is output.
WFCK is set low.
The $A7X command XOE OUT must be set to "0".
52
CXD3048R
$9X commands
Command
Function
specification
Command bit
DSPB = 0
DSPB = 1
Processing
Normal-speed playback, C2 error quadruple correction.
Double-speed playback, C2 error double correction. (quadruple correction when ERC4 = 1)
Data 1
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
D0
1
DSPB
ON-OFF
ASEQ
ON-OFF
1
BiliGL
MAIN
BiliGL
SUB
FLFC
0
Normally FLFC = 0.
In CAV-W mode, set FLFC to "1" independently of the playback speed.
Command bit
BiliGL SUB = 0
BiliGL SUB = 1
Definition of bilingual capable MAIN, SUB and STEREO
The left channel input is output to the left and right channels for MAIN.
The right channel input is output to the left and right channels for SUB.
The left and right channel inputs are output to the left and right channels, respectively, for STEREO.
BiliGL MAIN = 0
STEREO
SUB
BiliGL MAIN = 1
MAIN
Mute
Command
Function
specification
This switches the digital PLL master clock.
Either the conventional mode or the 2/3 mode (2/3 of the conventional clock) can be selected.
Command bit
DIV4 = 0
DIV4 = 1
Processing
Digital PLL master clock; conventional mode. (preset)
Digital PLL master clock; 2/3 mode.
Note) Do not set DIV4 to "1" when DSPB = 0.
D3
0
Data 3
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
D3
1
Data 4
D2
0
D1
0
D0
1
D3
0
Data 5
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
Data 6
Data 7
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
0
0
0
DIV4
0
0
0
53
CXD3048R
Command
Audio CTRL
Data 1
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
0
Mute
ATT
PCT1
PCT2
0
SOC2
$AX commands
Command bit
Mute = 0
Mute = 1
Meaning
Mute off if other mute
conditions are not set.
Mute on. Peak register
reset.
Command bit
ATT = 0
ATT = 1
Meaning
Attenuation off.
12dB
Mute conditions
(1) When register A mute = 1.
(2) When register 8 DOUT Mute F = 1 and Digital Out is on ($B command MD2 = 1).
(3) When GFS stays low for over 35ms (during normal-speed).
(4) When register 9 BiliGL MAIN = Sub = 1.
(5) When register A PCT1 = 1 and PCT2 = 0.
(1) to (3) perform zero-cross muting with a 1ms time limit.
Command bit
PCT1
Meaning
Normal mode
Level meter mode
Peak meter mode
Normal mode
PCT2
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
PCM Gain
0dB
0dB
Mute
0dB
ECC error correction ability
C1: double; C2: quadruple
C1: double; C2: quadruple
C1: double; C2: double
C1: double; C2: double
Description of level meter mode (see Timing Chart 1-4.)
When the LSI is set to this mode, it performs digital level meter functions.
When the 96-bit clock is input to SQCK, 96 bits of data are output to SQSO.
The initial 80 bits are subcode-Q data (see "[2] Subcode Interface"). The last 16 bits are LSB first, which are
15-bit PCM data (absolute values) and an L/R flag.
The final bit (L/R flag) is high when the 15-bit PCM data is from the left channel and low when the data is
from the right channel.
The PCM data is reset and the L/R flag is inverted after one readout.
Then the measurement for the maximum value continues until the next readout.
54
CXD3048R
Description of peak meter mode (see Timing Chart 1-5.)
When the LSI is set to this mode, the maximum PCM data value is detected regardless of if it comes from
the left or right channel.
The 96-bit clock must be input to SQCK to read out this data.
When the 96-bit clock is input, 96 bits of data are output to SQSO and the value is set in the LSI internal
register again.
In other words, the PCM maximum value register is not reset by the readout.
To reset the PCM maximum value register to "0", set PCT1 = PCT2 = 0 or set the $AX command Mute.
The subcode-Q absolute time is automatically controlled in this mode.
In other words, after the maximum value is generated, the absolute time for CRC to become OK is retained in
the memory. Normal operation is conducted for the relative time.
The final bit (L/R flag) of the 96-bit data is normally "0".
The pre-value hold and average value interpolation data are fixed to level (
) for this mode.
SENS output switching
This command is used to output the SQSO pin signal from the SENS pin.
When SOC2 = 0, SENS output is performed as usual.
When SOC2 = 1, the SQSO pin signal is output from the SENS pin.
At this time, the readout clock is input to the SCLK pin.
Note) Perform the SOC2 switching when SQCK = SCLK = high.
Command bit
SOC2 = 0
SOC2 = 1
Processing
The SENS signal is output from the SENS pin as usual.
The SQSO pin signal is output from the SENS pin.
Command
Audio CTRL
D3
0
Data 3
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
Data 4
D2
1
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
Data 5
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
Data 6
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
55
CXD3048R
Command
A4
(Signal select)
$A4 commands (preset: $A4C800)
D3
0
Data 1
D2
1
D1
0
D0
0
D3
RSL1
Data 2
D2
RSL0
D1
0
D0
0
D3
DTSL
1
Data 3
D2
DTSL
0
D1
MCSL
1
D0
MCSL
0
D3
0
Data 4
D2
SDSL
2
D1
SDSL
1
D0
SDSL
0
D3
EN
XSOE
Data 5
D2
CKOUT
SL2
D1
CKOUT
SL1
D0
SLD
BBIN
D3
max
C2PO7
Data 6
D2
max
C2PO6
D1
max
C2PO5
D0
max
C2PO4
D3
max
C2PO3
Data 7
D2
max
C2PO2
D1
max
C2PO1
D0
max
C2PO0
RSL1, RSL0:
These bits set the external buffer RAM.
RSL1
0
1
1
Processing
The external buffer RAM is set to 4M bits.
No selected.
The external buffer RAM is set to 16M bits.
RSL0
0
0
1
: preset
DTSL1, DTSL0: See the second half of the description of $A4 commands.
MCSL1:
This bit sets the DAC block master clock.
When "0", the DAC block master clock is set to 16.9344MHz (384fs). (default)
When "1", the DAC block master clock is set to 33.8688MHz (768fs).
MCSL0:
This bit sets the shock-proof memory controller block master clock.
When "0", the shock-proof memory controller block master clock is set to 16.9344MHz (384fs).
(default)
When "1", the shock-proof memory controller block master clock is set to 33.8688MHz (768fs).
ENXSOE:
This bit switches the command input method.
When "0", the command transfer clock and the SENS serial data readout clock are input
from the respective pins. (default)
When "1", the command transfer clock and the SENS serial data readout clock are input
from the CLOK pin.
The clock input is switched with the XSOE pin. At this time, connect the SCLK pin to high.
ENXSOE
0
0
1
1
XSOE pin
L
H
L
H
CLOK pin
Command transfer clock input
Command transfer clock input
SENS serial data readout
clock input
Command transfer clock input
SCLK pin
SENS serial data readout
clock input
SENS serial data readout
clock input
Connect to high.
Connect to high.
In addition, when ENXSOE is set to "1" and the SQSO pin signal output is read from the
SENS pin, the command input method is as follows.
At this time, connect the SCLK and SQCK pins to high.
See the command descriptions for $A command SOC2 and $8 commands TXOUT, SOCT0
and SOCT1.
56
CXD3048R
ENXS
OE
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CLOK pin
Command transfer
clock input
SENS serial data
readout clock input
Subcode-Q readout
clock input
Readout clock input of
the spindle speed
measurement result
Various signal readout
clock input
Error rate readout
clock input
CD TEXT data
readout clock input
Readout clock input of
shock-proof memory
controller serial data
XSOE
pin
H
L
L
L
L
L
L
L
$A
SOC2
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
$A8
SDTO
OUT
0
0
0
0
0
1
$8
TX
OUT
0
0
0
0
1
$8
SOC
T0
0
0
1
1
$8
SOC
T1
0
1
0
1
SENS pin
High or low output
SENS output
1
Subcode-Q output
Spindle speed
measurement
result output
2
Various signal
output
3
Error rate output
4
CD TEXT data
output
Shock-proof
memory controller
serial data output
: don't care
1
See "1-4. Description of SENS Signals" for the SENS output.
2
See Timing Chart 2-5 for the spindle speed measurement result.
3
The output signals are PER7 to PER0, FOK, GFS, LOCK, EMPH, ALOCK and VF9 to
VF0. For details, see Timing Chart 2-4.
4
For the error rate timing, see Timing Chart 2-6.
CKOUTSL2, CKOUTSL1:
These bits select the clock output from the R4M pin.
When the crystal is 16.9344MHz and XTSL = high, the output frequency is halved.
CKOUTSL2
0
0
1
1
Processing
4.2336MHz output
8.4672MHz (R8M) output
4.2336MHz (C4M) output
Changes in CAV-W mode and variable pitch mode.
CKOUTSL1
0
1
0
1
: preset
DTSL1, DTSL0: These bits select the data output from the DOUT pin.
In external mode, the data input through the LRCKI, BCKI and PCMDI pins is used.
DOUT output in the following tables is valid when $34A commands DOUT EN1 and DOUT
EN2 are both 1. In this case, see "$34A commands".
When $34A commands DOUT EN1 and DOUT EN2 are both 0, see "4-5-2. Digital Out
from DA Interface Input".
At this time, the data from the CD DSP is output from the DOUT pin with a subcode is added.
57
CXD3048R
DTSL1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DTSL0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
SDSL2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
SDSL1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
SDSL0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Input to DAC block
DSP mode
Shock-proof
memory controller
mode
DSP mode
Shock-proof
memory controller
mode
DSP mode
Shock-proof
memory controller
mode
DSP mode
Shock-proof
memory controller
mode
DOUT output
DSP & DAC mode
Shock-proof
memory controller
& DAC mode
DSP mode
Shock-proof
memory controller
mode
DSP mode
External mode
PCMD output
DSP mode
DSP & DAC mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
Shock-proof memory
controller & DAC mode
DSP mode
DSP & DAC mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
Shock-proof memory
controller & DAC mode
DSP mode
DSP & DAC mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
Shock-proof memory
controller & DAC mode
DSP mode
DSP & DAC mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
Shock-proof memory
controller & DAC mode
: preset
1
: The relationship between LRCK, BCK and PCMD changes according to the setting value.
When SDSL0 = 0, the LRCK, BCK and PCMD phase difference is constant but the LRCK frequency
changes when SDSL0 is switched.
When SDSL0 = 1, the LRCK frequency is constant but the phase difference between LRCK, BCK and
PCMD changes before and after SDSL1 is switched. When not switching the output data selection, set
SDSL1 and SDSL0 to the same value.
SDSL2, SDSL1: These bits select the data input to the DAC block and the data output from the PCMD pin.
SLDBBIN:
This bit selects the data input to the DAC block and the data output from the PCMD and
DOUT pins.
max C2PO7 to max C2PO0:
These bits set the C2PO conditions.
When SLDBBIN = 0, the internally connected data is selected. (default)
max C2PO7 to max C2PO0
00000000 to 11111111
Ptocessing
The C2PO upper limit value reflected to mon C2PO and
added to the write prohibited condition.
58
CXD3048R
DTSL1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
DTSL0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
SDSL2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
SDSL1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
SDSL0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Input to DAC block
External mode
DOUT output
External & DAC
mode
DSP mode
Shock-proof
memory controller
mode
DSP mode
External mode
PCMD output
DSP mode
External & DAC mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
External & DAC mode
DSP mode
External & DAC mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
External & DAC mode
DSP mode
External & DAC mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
External & DAC mode
DSP mode
External & DAC mode
Shock-proof memory
controller mode
External & DAC mode
When SLDBBIN = 1, the data input from the LRCKI, BCKI and PCMDI pins is selected.
1
: The relationship between LRCK, BCK and PCMD changes according to the setting value.
When SDSL0 = 0, the LRCK, BCK and PCMD phase difference is constant but the LRCK frequency
changes when SDSL0 is switched.
When SDSL0 = 1, the LRCK frequency is constant but the phase difference between LRCK, BCK and
PCMD changes before and after SDSL1 is switched. When not switching the output data selection, set
SDSL1 and SDSL0 to the same value.
59
CXD3048R
Command
A5
(Bass boost)
$A5 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 0) (preset: $A504000)
D3
0
Data 1
D2
1
D1
0
D0
1
D3
0
Data 2
D2
0
D1
1
D0
ZMUT
A
D3
SMUT
Data 3
D2
AD10
D1
AD9
D0
AD8
D3
AD7
Data 4
D2
AD6
D1
AD5
D0
AD4
D3
setup
Data 6
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
ZMUTA:
This bit sets the zero detection analog mute on/off.
When "0", zero detection analog mute is on. (default)
When "1", zero detection analog mute is off.
When zero data is detected for both the left and right channels, the LPF block output is set
to center output.
SMUT:
This bit sets the soft mute on/off.
When "0", soft mute is off. (default)
When "1", soft mute is on.
AD10 to AD0:
These bits set the attenuation data. The attenuation data consists of 11 bits, and is set as
follows.
Attenuation data
7FF (h)
7FE (h)
:
402 (h)
401 (h)
400 (h)
3FF (h)
3FE (h)
:
001 (h)
000 (h)
Audio output
+6.02dB
+6.016dB
:
+0.017dB
+0.0085dB
0dB
0.0085dB
0.017dB
:
60.206dB
: preset
The audio output from 001 (h) to 7FF (h) is obtained using the following equation:
Audio data output = 20 log [dB]
setup:
This bit can shorten the rise time of the VREFL and VREFR pins.
When "0", the rise time is not shortened. (default) (Recommendation setting when the
external capacitance is 1F or less.)
When "1", the rise time is shortened. (Recommendation setting when the external
capacitance exceeds 1F.)
Return setup to 0 after the VREFL and VREFR pins rise. (setup = 0 for normal use)
D3
AD3
Data 5
D2
AD2
D1
AD1
D0
AD0
Attenuation data
1024
60
CXD3048R
Command
A5
(Bass boost)
$A5 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 1) (preset: $A540A4)
D3
0
Data 1
D2
1
D1
0
D0
1
D3
0
Data 2
D2
1
D1
PWDN
D0
ZDPL
D3
WOC
Data 3
D2
DAC
EMPH
D1
HiCut
FILTER
D0
BST
CL
D3
1
Data 4
D2
PDM
SEL
D1
OBIT
1
D0
OBIT
0
D3
0
Data 5
D2
1
D1
0
D0
0
PWDN:
This bit sets the DAC block operation mode.
When "0", the DAC block clock is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power
consumption. (default)
The zero detection flag for the headphone volume circuit side is output from the LRMU pin.
When "1", the DAC block operates normally.
ZDPL:
This bit sets the zero detection flag polarity.
When "0", the LRMU pin is set low during mute. (default)
When "1", the LRMU pin is set high during mute.
WOC:
When WOC = 1, the DAC sync window opens. This is used to synchronize the DAC.
DAC EMPH:
This bit sets the digital de-emphasis on/off.
When "0", digital de-emphasis is off. (default)
When "1", digital de-emphasis is on.
HiCutFILTER:
This bit sets the high-cut filter on/off.
When "0", the high-cut filter is off. (default)
When "1", the high-cut filter is on.
BSTCL:
This bit sets the bass boost level clear on/off.
1: On; the set bass boost level is cleared to 0dB.
0: Off; normal operation (default)
PDMSEL:
This bit switches the PDM signal output from the DAC block.
When "0", connect the external resistors and capacitors to the VREFL and VREFR pins. (default)
When "1", connect the external capacitors to the VREFL and VREFR pins.
OBIT1
0
0
1
Serial data word length
20 bits
18 bits
16 bits
OBIT0
0
1
0
: preset
OBIT1, OBIT0:
These bits set the word length of the serial data output from the PCMD pin.
The serial data word length can be selected only when the data output from the PCMD pin
is set to DAC output.
22k
22k
1F
100
2200pF
AOUT1 (2)
VREFL (R)
Analog out
1F
100
2200pF
AOUT1 (2)
VREFL (R)
Analog out
LPF external circuit example (PDMSEL = 0)
LPF external circuit example (PDMSEL = 1)
61
CXD3048R
Command
A5
(Bass boost)
$A5 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 1, D2 = 0) (preset: $A58000)
D3
0
Data 1
D2
1
D1
0
D0
1
D3
1
Data 2
D2
0
D1
BBON
1
D0
BBON
0
D3
HBON
1
Data 3
D2
HBON
0
D1
BBSL
1
D0
BBSL
0
D3
HBSL
1
Data 4
D2
HBSL
0
D1
BBST
Vdwn1
D0
BBST
Vdwn0
D3
BBST
Vup1
Data 5
D2
BBST
Vup0
D1
BBST
Uth
D0
BBST
Lth
BBON1, BBON0: These bits set the bass boost on/off and the turnover frequency.
BBON1
0
0
1
1
BBON0
0
1
0
1
Processing
Bass boost is off.
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 125Hz.
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 160Hz.
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 200Hz.
: preset
HBON1, HBON0: These bits set the high boost on/off and the turnover frequency.
HBON1
0
1
1
HBON0
0
0
1
Processing
High boost is off.
High boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 5kHz.
High boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 7kHz.
: preset
BBSL1, BBSL0: These bits set the boost level for bass boost.
BBSL1
0
0
1
1
BBSL0
0
1
0
1
Processing
The boost level for bass boost is set to 10dB.
The boost level for bass boost is set to 14dB.
The boost level for bass boost is set to 18dB.
The boost level for bass boost is set to 22dB.
: preset
HBSL1, HBSL0: These bits set the boost level for high boost.
HBSL1
0
0
1
1
HBSL0
0
1
0
1
Processing
The boost level for high boost is set to 4dB.
The boost level for high boost is set to 6dB.
The boost level for high boost is set to 8dB.
The boost level for high boost is set to 10dB.
: preset
62
CXD3048R
BBST Vdwn1, BBST Vdwn0: These bits set the boost attack time (Vol Down) for bass and high boost.
BBST Vdwn1
0
0
1
BBST Vdwn0
0
1
1
Processing
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to standard.
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to fast.
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to slow.
: preset
BBST Vup1, BBST Vup0: These bits set the boost release time (Vol Up) for bass and high boost.
BBST Vup1
0
0
1
BBST Vup0
0
1
1
Processing
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to standard.
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to fast.
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to slow.
: preset
BBST Uth:
This bit sets the bass and high boost Uth.
When "0", Uth is set to 1.9dB. (default)
When "1", Uth is set to 0.9dB.
BBST Lth:
This bit sets the bass and high boost Lth.
When "0", Lth is set to 12dB. (default)
When "1", Lth is set to 4.4dB.
When the volume rises above Uth, the boost level is reduced. The speed at which the boost level is reduced
is the attack time.
When the volume falls below Lth, the boost level is increased up to the setting value. The speed at which the
boost level is increased is the release time.
$A5 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 1, D2 = 1) (preset: $A5C000)
Command
A5
(Bass boost)
D3
0
Data 1
D2
1
D1
0
D0
1
D3
1
Data 2
D2
1
D1
COMP
ON
D0
0
D3
0
Data 3
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
Data 4
D2
0
D1
1
D0
0
D3
0
Data 5
D2
0
D1
0
D0
PDM
INV
COMP ON:
This bit sets the compressor on/off.
When "0", the compressor is off. (default)
When "1", the compressor is on.
PDM INV:
This bit sets the DAC block PDM signal polarity.
When "0", the polarity is set to non-inverted. (default)
When "1", the polarity is set to inverted.
63
CXD3048R
Command
A6
(Headphone)
$A6 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 0) (preset: $A604000)
D3
0
Data 1
D2
1
D1
1
D0
0
D3
0
Data 2
D2
0
D1
1
D0
0
D3
SMUT
Data 3
D2
AD10
D1
AD9
D0
AD8
D3
AD7
Data 4
D2
AD6
D1
AD5
D0
AD4
SMUT:
This bit sets the soft mute on/off.
When "0", soft mute is off. (default)
When "1", soft mute is on.
AD10 to AD0:
These bits set the attenuation data. The attenuation data consists of 11 bits, and is set as
follows.
D3
AD3
Data 5
D2
AD2
D1
AD1
D0
AD0
Attenuation data
7FF (h)
7FE (h)
:
402 (h)
401 (h)
400 (h)
3FF (h)
3FE (h)
:
001 (h)
000 (h)
Audio output
+6.02dB
+6.016dB
:
+0.017dB
+0.0085dB
0dB
0.0085dB
0.017dB
:
60.206dB
: preset
The audio output from 001 (h) to 7FF (h) is obtained using the following equation:
Audio data output = 20 log [dB]
Attenuation data
1024
64
CXD3048R
Command
A6
(Headphone)
$A6 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 1) (preset: $A640A4)
D3
0
Data 1
D2
1
D1
1
D0
0
D3
0
Data 2
D2
1
D1
PWDN
D0
ZDPL
D3
WOC
Data 3
D2
DAC
EMPH
D1
HiCut
FILTER
D0
BST
CL
D3
1
Data 4
D2
PDM
SEL
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
Data 5
D2
1
D1
0
D0
0
PWDN:
This bit sets the headphone block operation mode.
When "0", the headphone block clock is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power
consumption. (default)
When "1", the headphone block operates normally.
ZDPL:
This bit sets the zero detection flag polarity. The zero detection flag for the headphone
volume circuit is output from the LRMU pin when $A6 PWDN = 0.
When "0", the LRMU pin is set low during mute. (default)
When "1", the LRMU pin is set high during mute.
WOC:
When WOC = 1, the headphone sync window opens. This is used to synchronize the DAC.
DAC EMPH:
This bit sets the digital de-emphasis on/off.
When "0", digital de-emphasis is off. (default)
When "1", digital de-emphasis is on.
HiCutFILTER:
This bit sets the high-cut filter on/off.
When "0", the high-cut filter is off. (default)
When "1", the high-cut filter is on.
BSTCL:
This bit sets the bass boost level clear on/off.
1: On; the set bass boost level is cleared to 0dB.
0: Off; normal operation (default)
PDMSEL
This bit switches the PDM signal output from the headphone block.
PDMSEL = 1
PDMSEL = 0
1 output
0 output
1 output
0 output
Left channel side waveform (Right channel side waveform is inverted.)
65
CXD3048R
Command
A6
(Headphone)
$A6 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 1, D2 = 0) (preset: $A68000)
D3
0
Data 1
D2
1
D1
1
D0
0
D3
1
Data 2
D2
0
D1
BBON
1
D0
BBON
0
D3
HBON
1
Data 3
D2
HBON
0
D1
BBSL
1
D0
BBSL
0
D3
HBSL
1
Data 4
D2
HBSL
0
D1
BBST
Vdwn1
D0
BBST
Vdwn0
D3
BBST
Vup1
Data 5
D2
BBST
Vup0
D1
BBST
Uth
D0
BBST
Lth
BBON1, BBON0: These bits set the bass boost on/off and the turnover frequency.
BBON1
0
0
1
1
BBON0
0
1
0
1
Processing
Bass boost is off.
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 125Hz.
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 160Hz.
Bass boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 200Hz.
: preset
HBON1, HBON0: These bits set the high boost on/off and the turnover frequency.
HBON1
0
1
1
HBON0
0
0
1
Processing
High boost is off.
High boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 5kHz.
High boost is on and the turnover frequency is set to 7kHz.
: preset
BBSL1, BBSL0: These bits set the boost level for bass boost.
BBSL1
0
0
1
1
BBSL0
0
1
0
1
Processing
The boost level for bass boost is set to 10dB.
The boost level for bass boost is set to 14dB.
The boost level for bass boost is set to 18dB.
The boost level for bass boost is set to 22dB.
: preset
HBSL1, HBSL0: These bits set the boost level for high boost.
HBSL1
0
0
1
1
HBSL0
0
1
0
1
Processing
The boost level for high boost is set to 4dB.
The boost level for high boost is set to 6dB.
The boost level for high boost is set to 8dB.
The boost level for high boost is set to 10dB.
: preset
66
CXD3048R
BBST Vdwn1, BBST Vdwn0:
These bits set the boost attack time (Vol Down) for bass and high boost.
BBST Vdwn1
0
0
1
BBST Vdwn0
0
1
1
Processing
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to standard.
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to fast.
The boost attack time for bass and high boost is set to slow.
: preset
BBST Vup1, BBST Vup0:
These bits set the boost release time (Vol Up) for bass and high boost.
BBST Vup1
0
0
1
BBST Vup0
0
1
1
Processing
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to standard.
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to fast.
The boost release time for bass and high boost is set to slow.
: preset
BBST Uth:
This bit sets the bass and high boost Uth.
When "0", Uth is set to 1.9dB. (default)
When "1", Uth is set to 0.9dB.
BBST Lth:
This bit sets the bass and high boost Lth.
When "0", Lth is set to 12dB. (default)
When "1", Lth is set to 4.4dB.
When the volume rises above Uth, the boost level is reduced. The speed at which the boost level is reduced
is the attack time.
When the volume falls below Lth, the boost level is increased up to the setting value. The speed at which the
boost level is increased is the release time.
$A6 commands (when Data 2 D3 = 1, D2 = 1) (preset: $A6C000)
Command
A6
(Headphone)
D3
0
Data 1
D2
1
D1
1
D0
0
D3
1
Data 2
D2
1
D1
COMP
ON
D0
0
D3
0
Data 3
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
Data 4
D2
0
D1
1
D0
0
D3
0
Data 5
D2
0
D1
0
D0
PDM
INV
COMP ON:
This bit sets the compressor on/off.
When "0", the compressor is off. (default)
When "1", the compressor is on.
PDM INV:
This bit sets the headphone block PDM signal polarity.
When "0", the polarity is set to non-inverted. (default)
When "1", the polarity is set to inverted.
67
CXD3048R
$A7 commands (preset: $A7200000)
Command
A7
(Shock-proof
memory setting)
D3
0
Data 1
D2
1
D1
1
D0
1
D3
SL
XQOK
Data 2
D2
SL
XWRE
D1
GTOP
CHECK
D0
NOLIM
WDCK
D3
SPSL
COM
Data 3
D2
READ
2
D1
REF
SEL
D0
REF
ON
D3
XOE
OUT
Data 4
D2
MSL2
D1
MSL1
D0
MSL0
D3
A11
SEL
Data 7
D2
READ
S2
D1
READ
S1
D0
MON
SEL
SL XQOK:
This bit sets the XQOK control mode.
When "0", XQOK should be controlled for the period from when SCOR goes high until
GRSCOR goes high. (default)
When "1", XQOK should be controlled for the period while GRSCOR is high.
SL XWRE:
This bit sets the XWRE control mode.
When "0", XWRE should be controlled for the period from when SCOR goes high until
GRSCOR goes high. (default)
When "1", XWRE should be controlled for the period while GRSCOR is high.
GTOP CHECK: This bit controls GRSCOR generation when GTOP is high.
When "0", the GRSCOR generation circuit is not resynchronized even when GTOP is high.
When "1", the GRSCOR generation circuit is resynchronized when GTOP goes high. (default)
NOLIM WDCK: Always set to "1".
SPSL COM:
This bit sets whether to control XQOK, XWRE and XRDE with pins or serial data.
When "0", XQOK, XWRE and XRDE should be controlled with pins. (default)
When "1", XQOK, XWRE and XRDE should be controlled with serial data ($A8).
Note) The Data 3 D3 and Data 6 D1 bits should be switched somultaneously.
READ2,
READS2, READS1:
This bit sets the audio data readout speed from the shock-proof memory controller block.
D3
XWI
H2
Data 6
D2
XWI
H1
D1
SPSL
COM
D0
WQR
MON
D3
ADDRST
SEL
Data 5
D2
ADR
MO
D1
0
D0
STA
SEL
Readout speed setting
1
speed readout
0.5
speed readout
0.25
speed readout
--
2
speed readout
: preset
The shock-proof memory controller interior should be resynchronized after the readout speed
is switched. Execute the $AAX ADPWO command for resynchronization.
READ2
0
0
0
0
1
READS2
0
0
1
1
READS1
0
1
0
1
68
CXD3048R
Reflesh rate
11.51ms/2048 times
5.81ms/2048 times
46.44ms/2048 times
23.22ms/2048 times
: preset
REF ON:
This bit sets the DRAM refresh function on/off.
When "0", the refresh function is off. (default)
When "1", the refresh function is on.
XOE OUT:
This bit switches the WFCK pin output mode.
When "0", WFCK is output from the WFCK pin. (default)
When "1", XOE is output from the WFCK pin.
MSL2 to MSL0:
These bits set the DRAM area that can be accessed from the microcomputer.
REFSEL2
0
0
1
1
REFSEL
0
1
0
1
REF SEL:
This bit sets the DRAM refresh rate. (Use this bit in conjunction with the $AC command
REFSEL2.)
DRAM area that can be accessed from the microcomputer
: preset
ADDRST SEL:
This bit selects the address reset mode.
When "0", the conventional address reset is used. (default)
When "1", the address is reset by the ADDRST command.
ADRMO:
This bit selects the remaining valid addresses.
When "0", the conventional remaining valid addresses are displayed. (default)
When "1", the remaining addresses from 0000000 to 1111111 are displayed.
XWIH2:
The XWIH condition addition is selected.
When "0", the condition is added. (default)
When "1", the write speed condition is added to the write prohibited condition.
XWIH1:
The XWIH condition addition is selected.
When "0", the condition is not added. (default)
When "1", the condition of failure access to DRAM is added to the write prohibited condition.
WQR MON:
This bit selects the XWRE, XQOK and XRDE outputs.
When "0", XWRE, XQOK and XRDE output is prohibited. (default)
When "1", XWRE, XQOK and XRDE output is allowed.
MSL2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
MSL1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
MSL0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
The entire DRAM area can be used as audio data.
32K bits
64K bits
128K bits
256K bits
512K bits
1M bits
2M bits
69
CXD3048R
A11 SEL:
This bit selects the A11 pin function.
When "0", the A11 pin is used as the A11 pin. (default)
When "1", the A11 pin is used as a low-active write prohibit factor.
STA SEL:
This bit selects the shock-proof memory controller status output.
When "1", the conventional ESP status is output. (See 4-13-3.)
When "0", the new shock-proof memory controller status is output. (default)
The status readout when STA SEL = 0 is as follows.
MONSEL:
This bit selects the COUT, XUGF, MIRR and XPCK pin functions.
When "0", these pins output the signals corresponding to the SRO1, MTSL1 and MTSL0
commands. (See the table on page 8.)
When "1", these pins output SCOR, QRCVD and GTOP, respectively.
Description
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
D12
D13
D14
D15
D16
D17
D18
D19
D20
D21
D22
D23
Signal
XWPHD
QRCVD
XEMP
monGRSCOR
monC2PO
GTOP
--
AM13
AM14
AM15
AM16
AM17
AM18
AM19
AM20
AM21
--
--
monADPCM
XFUL
ROF
SPOVER
NOWR
--
0: Write prohibited
1: Address updated
0: No valid data
1: GRSCOR present
1: C2PO of the setting value or higher present
1: GTOP present in the preceding GRSCOR
Don't care.
Address monitor
Address monitor
Address monitor
Address monitor
Address monitor
Address monitor
Address monitor
Address monitor
Address monitor
Don't care.
Don't care.
1: ADPCM compression error
0: No write area
1: The DSP SRAM has overflowed.
1: The speed limit is exceeded for more than the set number
during one GRSCOR.
1: Access is failed in the shock-proof memory controller.
Don't care.
70
CXD3048R
$A8 commands (preset: $A8F8)
Command
D3
1
Data 1
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
D3
XQOK
Data 2
D2
XWRE
D1
XRDE
D0
XSOEO
D3
XSOEO
2
Data 3
D2
ADDR
ST
D1
0
D0
SDTO
OUT
XQOK, XWRE, XRDE:
When $A7 command SPSL COM = 1, XQOK, XWRE and XRDE are controlled with serial
data. (default: 1)
XSOEO:
This bit controls the serial data from the shock-proof block.
Shock-proof block data is loaded to the serial readout register by detecting the falling edge
of XSOEO.
XSOEO2:
This bit is used when the microcomputer reads data from the DRAM. (default: 1)
The shock-proof memory controller block loads the data from the DRAM to the serial
readout register by detecting the fall of XSOEO2.
ADDRST:
This command is valid when $A7 command ADDRST SEL = 1.
When "0", no operations are performed. (default)
When "1", the VWA, WA and RA are all reset.
SDTO OUT:
This bit is used to output serial data from the shock-proof block to the SQSO pin.
When "0", various signals are output from the SQSO pin. For details on these signals, see
$8X commands SOCT1, SOCT0 and TXOUT. (default)
When "1", the shock-proof block serial data is output from the SQSO pin.
A8
(Shock-proof
memory control)
71
CXD3048R
$A9 commands (preset: $A90000)
Command
A9
(DOUT subcode-Q
setting)
D3
1
Data 1
D2
0
D1
0
D0
1
D3
SubQ
A3
Data 2
D2
SubQ
A2
D1
SubQ
A1
D0
SubQ
A0
D3
0
Data 3
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
D3
SubQ
D7
Data 4
D2
SubQ
D6
D1
SubQ
D5
D0
SubQ
D4
D3
Data 7
D2
D1
D0
SubQA3 to SubQA0, SubQD7 to SubQD0:
These bits set the Ubit inside the DOUT generation circuit in the DAC block. Note that these
bits have no effect on the DOUT generation circuit in the CD DSP block.
D3
Data 6
D2
D1
D0
D3
SubQ
D3
Data 5
D2
SubQ
D2
D1
SubQ
D1
D0
SubQ
D0
Setting contents
Control, address
Movement number
INDEX number
Elapsed time within a
movement (minutes)
Elapsed time within a
movement (seconds)
Elapsed time within a
movement (frames)
(Set to "0".)
Absolute time (minutes)
Absolute time (seconds)
Absolute time (frames)
(Control command)
SubQD0
Q8
Q16
Q24
Q32
Q40
Q48
Q56
Q64
Q72
Q80
0
SubQD1
Q7
Q15
Q23
Q31
Q39
Q47
Q55
Q63
Q71
Q79
0
SubQD2
Q6
Q14
Q22
Q30
Q38
Q46
Q54
Q62
Q70
Q78
0
SubQD3
Q5
Q13
Q21
Q29
Q37
Q45
Q53
Q61
Q69
Q77
DLD
SubQD4
Q4
Q12
Q20
Q28
Q36
Q44
Q52
Q60
Q68
Q76
DUP0
SubQD5
Q3
Q11
Q19
Q27
Q35
Q43
Q51
Q59
Q67
Q75
DUP1
SubQD6
Q2
Q10
Q18
Q26
Q34
Q42
Q50
Q58
Q66
Q74
DCL
SubQD7
Q1
Q9
Q17
Q25
Q33
Q41
Q49
Q57
Q65
Q73
DON
SubAD0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
SubQA1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
SubQA2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
SubQA3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
DON: This bit sets the Ubit output on/off inside the DOUT generation circuit in the DAC block.
When "0", Ubit is not output. (default)
When "1", Ubit is output.
DCL:
This bit clears the elapsed time within a movement to "0".
The elapsed time is cleared to "0" at the falling edge of DCL (DCL = 1
0). (default: DCL = 1)
DUP1: This bit sets the absolute time counter operate/stop.
When "0", the absolute time counter is stopped. (default)
When "1", the absolute time counter operates.
DUP0: This bit sets the elapsed time within a movement counter operate/stop.
When "0", the elapsed time within a movement counter is stopped. (default)
When "1", the elapsed time within a movement counter operates.
DLD:
This bit is used when setting the INDEX number, elapsed time within a movement, and absolute
time.
When "0", the settings cannot be changed. (default)
When "1", the settings can be changed. Note that "0" is output for the INDEX number, elapsed
time within a movement, and absolute time while DLD = 1.
The control, address and movement number settings can be changed regardless of the DLD setting.
72
CXD3048R
$A9E commands (preset: $A9E00000)
Command
A9E
(DRAM I/F)
D3
1
Data 1
D2
0
D1
0
D0
1
D3
1
Data 2
D2
1
D1
1
D0
0
D3
1
Data 3
D2
DRWR
D1
DRADR
D0
0
D3
DRD15
Data 4
D2
DRD14
D1
DRD13
D0
DRD12
D3
DRD3
Data 7
D2
DRD2
D1
DRD1
D0
DRD0
D3
DRD7
Data 6
D2
DRD6
D1
DRD5
D0
DRD4
D3
DRD11
Data 5
D2
DRD10
D1
DRD9
D0
DRD8
DRWR:
This bit sets write/read for access from the microcomputer to the DRAM.
When "0", the read from DRAM mode is set. (default)
When "1", the write to DRAM mode is set.
DRADR:
This bit sets the address control method for access from the microcomputer to the DRAM.
When "0", relative address control is set. (default)
When "1", absolute address control is set.
DRD15 to DRD0: These bits set the data to be written to the DRAM for access from the microcomputer to
the DRAM.
$A9F commands (preset: $A9F00000)
Command
A9F
(DRAM I/F)
D3
1
Data 1
D2
0
D1
0
D0
1
D3
1
Data 2
D2
1
D1
1
D0
1
D3
DADR
19
Data 3
D2
DADR
18
D1
DADR
17
D0
DADR
16
D3
DADR
15
Data 4
D2
DADR
14
D1
DADR
13
D0
DADR
12
D3
DADR
3
Data 7
D2
DADR
2
D1
DADR
1
D0
DADR
0
D3
DADR
7
Data 6
D2
DADR
6
D1
DADR
5
D0
DADR
4
D3
DADR
11
Data 5
D2
DADR
10
D1
DADR
9
D0
DADR
8
DADR19 to DADR0:
These bits set the DRAM address for access from the microcomputer to the DRAM.
73
CXD3048R
$AA commands (preset: $AA00004)
Command
AA
(Compression
setting)
D3
1
Data 1
D2
0
D1
1
D0
0
D3
ADP
ON
Data 2
D2
BIT
SL1
D1
BIT
SL0
D0
0
D3
ADP
WO
Data 3
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
Data 4
D2
GR
SEL
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
Data 6
D2
ORMU
D1
0
D0
0
D3
ADPCM
SEL
Data 5
D2
ADPCM
MUTE
D1
0
D0
0
ADPON:
This bit sets audio data compressed/uncompressed.
When "0", the audio data uses uncompressed mode. (default)
When "1", the audio mode is compressed mode.
BITSL1, BITSL0: These bits set the audio data compression mode.
Compression mode
4 bits
6 bits
8 bits
: preset
ADPWO:
The CD-DSP block LRCK and shock-proof memory controller block LRCK are resynchronized.
This command should be used when the read speed is changed by $A7 commands
READ2, READS2 and READS1.
When "0", not resynchronized. (default)
When "1", resynchronized.
Note) Set the $AD command CDDSP SLEEP to 0 for resynchronization.
ADPWO should be returned to "0" after ADPWO is set to "1" and one or more
LRCK cycle of CD-DSP block is waited.
GRSEL:
This bit selects the GRSCOR signal output. Note that GRSCOR is output from the WDCK
pin when $8 command SCOR SEL = 1.
When "0", the GRSCOR signal is output at the timing used inside the shock-proof memory
controller block. (default)
When "1", the GRSCOR signal generated by the CD DSP block is output.
ADPCM SEL:
This bit selects ADPCM compensation.
When "0", ADPCM is not compensated.
When "1", ADPCM is compensated.
ADPCM MUTE: This bit sets mute at ADPCM compensation.
When "0", it does not mute at ADPCM compensation.
When "1", it mutes at ADPCM compensation.
ORMU:
This bit controls the output signal from the LRMU pin.
When "0", the "0" detection flag for Lch and Rch (AND output) is output.
When "1", the OR output is made with the "0" detection flag for Lch and Rch (AND output)
and SYSM.
BITSL1
0
0
1
BITSL0
0
1
0
74
CXD3048R
$AB commands (preset: $AB000000)
Command
AB
(EFM playability
enhancement
setting)
D3
1
Data 1
D2
0
D1
1
D0
1
D3
ARD
TEN
Data 2
D2
1
D1
1
D0
1
D3
1
Data 3
D2
0
D1
1
D0
0
D3
0
Data 4
D2
0
D1
1
D0
0
D3
1
Data 7
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
D3
0
Data 6
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
D3
1
Data 5
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
ARDTEN:
This is the EFM playability enhancement setting.
When "0", the EFM playability enhancement function is off.
When "1", the EFM playability enhancement function is on.
Set this command in the condition when a disc is not being played back.
75
CXD3048R
$AC commands (preset: $AC0C001)
Command
AC
(Sync expansion
specification)
D3
1
Data 1
D2
1
D1
0
D0
0
D3
AVW
Data 2
D2
0
D1
SFP5
D0
SFP4
D3
SFP3
Data 3
D2
SFP2
D1
SFP1
D0
SFP0
D3
0
Data 4
D2
0
D1
0
D0
0
D3
OV3
Data 6
D2
OV2
D1
OV1
D0
OV0
D3
REF
SEL2
Data 5
D2
SLIM
1
D1
SLIM
0
D0
OV4
AVW:
This bit sets the sync protection window width automatic expansion function.
When "0", the sync protection window width automatic expansion function is off.
When "1", the sync protection window width automatic expansion function is on.
This setting is not affected by the sync forward protection times setting SFP5 to SFP0.
The sync protection window width (6 channel clocks when WSEL = 0, 26 channel
clocks when WSEL = 1) is widened 32 channel clocks at a time each time a sync mark
is inserted during the interval from the 16th forward protection until GFS goes high. When
the maximum window width is reached (when the window width exceeds 588 channel
clocks), GTOP goes high.
SFP5 to SFP0:
These bits set the frame sync forward protection times. The setting range is from 1 to 3F (h).
For details on frame sync protection, see "4-2. Frame Sync Protection".
Part of this command bit register is also used by $C SFP3 to SFP0. Of $AC SFP3 to
SFP0 or $C SFP3 to SFP0, the command bit setting made last is valid. When using an
existing status, set the value with $C SFP5 to SFP0. When using the $AC commands,
set $AC SFP3 to SFP0 to the value set by $C SFP3 to SFP0.
REFSEL2:
This bit sets the refresh rate to DRAM.
See the description of $A7 command REFSEL.
SLIM1, 0:
This bit sets the DRAM write speed limit value.
Write speed limit value
Up to 4.0
speed write
Up to 4.5
speed write
Up to 5.0
speed write
Up to 5.5
speed write
: preset
Note) This command is valid when $A7X XWIH2 = 1.
OV4 to OV0:
This bit sets the limit value of the speed violation number for one GRSCOR which is
reflected to XWIH.
SLIM1
0
0
1
1
SLIM0
0
1
0
1
Limit value of speed violation number
Can be set from 1 to 31 times.
: Preset value: 00001
Note) The violation speed is set with the $AC commands SLIM 1 and 0.
This command is valid when $A7X XWIH2 = 1.
OV4 to OV0
00000 to 11111
76
CXD3048R
$AD commands (preset: $AD040)
Command
AD
(Sleep setting)
D3
1
Data 1
D2
1
D1
0
D0
1
D3
ADCPS
Data 2
D2
DSP
SLEEP
D1
DSSP
SLEEP
D0
ASYM
SLEEP
D3
ESP
SLEEP
Data 3
D2
LPF
SLEEP
D1
DSUB
SLEEP
D0
ASEQ
SLEEP
D3
PCOL
Data 4
D2
HCAV
SLEEP
D1
ERCNT
SLEEP
D0
0
ADCPS:
This bit sets the operating mode of the DSSP block A/D converter.
When "0", the operating mode of the DSSP block A/D converter is set to normal. (default)
When "1", the operating mode of the DSSP block A/D converter is set to power saving.
DSP SLEEP:
This bit sets the operating mode of the DSP block.
When "0", the DSP block operates normally. (default)
When "1", the DSP block clock is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power
consumption.
DSSP SLEEP:
This bit sets the operating mode of the DSSP block.
When "0", the DSSP block operates normally. (default)
When "1", the DSSP block clock is stopped. In addition, the A/D converter and operational
amplifier in the DSSP block are set to standby mode. This makes it possible to reduce
power consumption.
ASYM SLEEP:
This bit sets the operating mode of the asymmetry correction circuit and VCO1/VCO2.
When "0", the asymmetry correction circuit and VCO1/VCO2 operate normally. (default)
When "1", the operational amplifier in the asymmetry correction circuit is set to standby
mode. In addition, the multiplier PLL VCO1 and wide-band PLL VCO2 oscillation are
stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power consumption.
ESP SLEEP:
This bit sets the operating mode of the shock-proof memory controller block.
When "0", the shock-proof memory controller block operates normally. (default)
When "1", the shock-proof memory controller block clock is stopped. This makes it possible
to reduce power consumption.
LPF SLEEP:
This bit sets the operating mode of the analog low-pass filter block.
When "0", the analog low-pass filter block operates normally.
When "1", the analog low-pass filter block is set to standby mode. (default) This makes it
possible to reduce power consumption.
DSUB SLEEP:
This bit sets the operating mode of the Ubit generation block inside the DOUT generation
circuit in the DAC block. This setting has no effect on the DOUT generation circuit in the
CD DSP block.
When "0", the Ubit generation block operates normally. (default)
When "1", The clock for the Ubit generation block inside the DOUT generation circuit in the
DAC block is stopped. This makes it possible to reduce power consumption. Also, in this
case Ubit is set to "0".
ASEQ SLEEP:
This bit sets the operation mode of the servo auto sequencer block.
When "0", the servo auto sequencer operates normally. (default)
When "1", the servo auto sequencer block clock is stopped. This makes the power
consumption to be reduced.
PCOL:
The PCOL pin in DSP sleep mode is fixed to low.
When "0", the PCO pin gradually becomes low by the external filter time constant. (default)
When "1", the PCO pin digitally becomes low.
Note) Set DSP SLEEP to "1" so that DSP sleep mode is entered.
HCAV SLEEP:
This bit sets the hard CAV block operation mode.
When "0", the hard CAV block operates normally. (default)
When "1", the hard CAV block clock is stopped. This makes the power consumption to be
reduced.
ERCNT SLEEP: This bit sets operation mode for the error rate counter block.
When "0", normally operates. (default)
When "1", the clock in the error rate counter block stops. This reduces the power consumption.
The DAC block clock can be stopped by setting $A5 command PWDN (when Data 2 D3 = 0, D2 = 1).
77
CXD3048R
$AE commands (preset: $AE0)
Command
D3
1
Data 1
D2
1
D1
1
D0
0
D3
VARI
ON
Data 2
D2
VARI
USE
D1
WTC
C2PO
D0
SCSY
(sub)
D3
SENS
SEL3
Data 3
D2
SENS
SEL2
D1
SENS
SEL1
D0
SENS
SEL0
D3
Data 4
D2
D1
D0
Command bit
VARION = 0
VARION = 1
Processing
Variable pitch mode is off. (The internal clock uses the crystal reference.)
Variable pitch mode is on. (The internal clock uses the VCO2 reference.)
Command bit
VARIUSE = 0
VARIUSE = 1
Processing
Set VARIUSE = 0 when not using variable pitch mode.
Set VARIUSE = 1 when using variable pitch mode.
See "$DX commands" for the variable pitch range and example of use.
WTC C2PO:
This bit selects the write prohibit factor to DRAM.
When "0", write prohibition is not allowed by the C2PO error number or external input.
When "1", write prohibition is allowed by the C2PO error number or external input.
Use this command only when $8 CDROM = 0.
Use this command in conjunction with the $AX command A11 SEL and $A4 commands
max C2PO7 to max C2PO0.
SCSY (sub):
This bit sets the GRSCOR resynchronization period.
See the $8X command SCSY. (Set the $8X command to "0" when using this bit.)
SENS SEL3 to SENS SEL0:
SENS
SEL3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
SENS switching
SENS serial data
Subcode Q
Various signals
Error rate
CD-TEXT
Shock-proof memory
controller status
Special area read
Special area status
VF0 to VF9
SENS
SEL2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
SENS
SEL1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
SENS
SEL0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
SOC2
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SDTO
OUT
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
TEXT
OUT
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
SOCT
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
1
SOCT
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
XSOE
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
XSOE
02
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AE
(Variable pitch
setting)
78
CXD3048R
$AF commands (preset: $AF8000)
Command
AF
(Spindle servo
setting)
D3
1
Data 1
D2
1
D1
1
D0
1
D3
SYG3
EA
Data 2
D2
SYG2
EA
D1
SYG1
EA
D0
SYG0
EA
D3
MDP
OUTSL1
Data 3
D2
MDP
OUTSL0
D1
LPWR2
D0
0
D3
MDS
CTL
Data 4
D2
MDP
UP
D1
0
D0
MDP
CTL4
D3
MDP
CTL3
Data 5
D2
MDP
CTL2
D1
MDP
CTL1
D0
MDP
CTL0
SYG3EA to SYG0EA:
These bits set the spindle drive output gain. However, this is valid only in CLV-N mode.
GAIN
0 (
dB)
0.125 (18.1dB)
0.250 (12.0dB)
0.375 (8.5dB)
0.500 (6.0dB)
0.625 (4.1dB)
0.750 (2.5dB)
0.875 (1.2dB)
1.000 (0.0dB)
1.125 (+1.0dB)
1.250 (+1.9dB)
1.375 (+2.8dB)
1.500 (+3.5dB)
1.625 (+4.2dB)
1.750 (+4.9dB)
1.875 (+5.5dB)
SYG3EA
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SYG2EA
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
SYG1EA
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
SYG0EA
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
: preset
MDP OUTSL1, MDP OUTSL0:
These bits set the spindle drive output method.
Spindle drive output
Ternary output from the MDP pin
Binary output from the MDS and MDP pins
Command-based MDP and MDS output control
MDP OUTSL1
0
1
0
MDP OUTSL0
0
0
1
: preset
79
CXD3048R
LPWR2:
The low output (brake pulse) of the MDP pin can be masked.
When "0", binary output is high or low output, and ternary output is high, low or high
impedance output. (default)
When "1", high or high impedance is output. This makes it possible to mask the brake pulse.
MDS CTL:
This bit sets the PWM output polarity according to the setting from the microcomputer.
(valid when MDP OUTSL1 = 0 and MDP OUTSL0 = 1)
When "0", the MDS pin output is set low.
When "1", the MDS pin output is set high.
MDP UP:
This bit switches the MDP pin according to the setting from the microcomputer. (valid when
MDP OUTSL1 = 0 and MDP OUTSL0 = 1)
When "0", the MDP pin output is set to PWM output.
When "1", the MDP pin output is set high.
MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0:
These bits set the PWM output value according to the setting from the microcomputer.
(valid when MDP OUTSL1 = 0 and MDP OUTSL0 = 1)
The carrier frequency is 176.4kHz. (88.2kHz when set to quasi-double speed)
At the minimum value (MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 0), the MDP pin output is set low.
At the maximum value (MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 1F (h)), the MDP pin output is set high
for 31/32 intervals.
Note that when $AF command MDP UP = 1, the MDP pin output is set high regardless of
the MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 setting value.
Command-based MDP and MDS output control (MDP OUTSL1 = 0, MDP OUTSL0 = 1)
(1) Timing Chart 1 LPWR2 = 0, MDP UP = 0, MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 10 (h)
5.67s (176kHz)
MDP
The MDP waveform ratio is set by MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0.
When MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 10 (h), 10 (h)/20 (h) intervals are high.
(2) Timing Chart 2 LPWR2 = 0, MDP UP = 1, MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 10 (h)
MDP
H
When MDP UP = 1, MDP is fixed high regardless of MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0.
(3) Timing Chart 3 LPWR2 = 1, MDP UP = 0, MDP CTL4 to MDP CTL0 = 10 (h)
MDP
Z
When LPWR2 = 1, the low output of MDP binary output becomes high impedance.
80
CXD3048R
Command
Traverse monitor
count setting
$BX commands
This command sets the traverse monitor count.
D3
2
15
Data 1
D2
2
14
D1
2
13
D0
2
12
D3
2
11
Data 2
D2
2
10
D1
2
9
D0
2
8
D3
2
7
Data 3
D2
2
6
D1
2
5
D0
2
4
D3
2
3
Data 4
D2
2
2
D1
2
1
D0
2
0
When the set number of tracks are counted during fine search, the sled control for the traverse cycle control
goes off.
The traverse monitor count is set to monitor the traverse status using the SENS outputs COMP and COUT.
The monitor output is set as follows.
Command
Data 5
Data 6
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
0
MTSL1 MTSL0 ASYE
MD2
0
0
Traverse monitor
count setting
Command bit
MTSL1
XUGF
MINT0
RFCK
C4M
MTSL0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Output data
XPCK
MNT1
XPCK
FSTO
GFS
MNT2
XROF
GFS
C2PO
MNT3
GTOP
C2PO
: preset
However, the $39 command SRO1 and $A7 command MON SEL must be set to "0".
Command bit
ASYE = 1
ASYE = 0
: preset
Processing
Asymmentry is on.
Asymmentry is off.
Command bit
MD2 = 0
MD2 = 1
: preset
Processing
Digital Out on/off control. Off when "0".
Digital Out on/off control. On when "1".
81
CXD3048R
$CX commands
CLVS mode gain setting: GCLVS
Command
Data 1
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
D0
Gain
MDP1
Gain
MDP0
Gain
MDS1
Gain
MDS0
Gain
CLVS
Gain
DCLV1
Gain
DCLV0
PCC1 PCC0
Spindle servo
coefficient setting
CLV CTRL ($DX)
Gain
MDS1
0
0
0
0
1
1
Gain
MDS0
0
0
1
1
0
0
Gain
CLVS
0
1
0
1
0
1
GCLVS
12dB
6dB
6dB
0dB
0dB
+6dB
CLVP mode gain setting: GMDP: GMDS
Gain
MDP1
0
0
1
Gain
MDP0
0
1
0
GMDP
6dB
0dB
+6dB
Gain
MDS1
0
0
1
Gain
MDS0
0
1
0
GMDS
6dB
0dB
+6dB
DCLV overall gain setting: GDCLV
Gain
DCLV1
0
0
1
Gain
DCLV0
0
1
0
GDCLV
0dB
+6dB
+12dB
Command bit
PCC1
The VPCO signal is output.
The VPCO pin output is high impedance.
The VPCO pin output is low.
The VPCO pin output is high.
PCC0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Processing
This command controls the VPCO pin signal.
The VPCO output can be controlled with this setting.
82
CXD3048R
Command
Data 3
Data 4
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
D0
SFP3
SFP2
SFP1
SFP0
SRP3
SRP2 SRP1
SRP0
Spindle servo
coefficient setting
Command bit
SFP3 to SFP0
Sets the number of frame sync forward protection times. The setting range is from 1 to F (h).
Processing
Command bit
SRP3 to SRP0
Sets the number of frame sync backward protection times. The setting range is from 1 to F (h).
Processing
See "4-2. Frame Sync Protection" regarding frame sync protection.
The CXD3048R can serially output the 40 bits (10 BCD codes) of error rate data selected by EDC7 to EDC0
from the SQSO pin and monitor this data using a microcomputer.
In order to output error rate data, set $C commands for C1 and C2 individually, and set $8 commands
SOCT0 and SOCT1 to "1". Then, the data can be read out from the SQSO pin by sending 40 SQCK pulses.
Command
Data 5
Data 6
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
D0
EDC7 EDC6 EDC5 EDC4 EDC3 EDC2 EDC1 EDC0
Spindle servo
coefficient setting
Preset value: 00h
Command bit
EDC7 = 0 EDC6
EDC5
EDC4
EDC3
EDC2
EDC1
EDC0
EDC7 = 1 EDC6
EDC5
EDC4
EDC3
EDC2
EDC1
EDC0
The [No C1 errors, pointer reset] count is output When "1".
The [One C1 error corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".
The [No C1 errors, pointer set] count is output When "1".
The [One C1 error corrected, pointer set] count is output When "1".
The [Two C1 errors corrected, pointer set] count is output When "1".
The [C1 correction impossible, pointer set] count is output When "1".
7350-frame count cycle mode
1
When "0".
73500-frame count cycle mode
2
When "1".
The [No C2 errors, pointer reset] count is output When "1".
The [One C2 error corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".
The [Two C2 errors corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".
The [Three C2 errors corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".
The [Four C2 errors corrected, pointer reset] count is output When "1".
The [C2 correction impossible, pointer copy] count is output When "1".
The [C2 correction impossible, pointer set] count is output When "1".
Prpcessing
1
The values selected by C1 (EDC1 to EDC6) and C2 (EDC0 to EDC6) are added to C1 and C2, respectively,
and output every 7350 frames.
2
The values selected by C1 (EDC1 to EDC6) and C2 (EDC0 to EDC6) are added to C1 and C2, respectively,
and output every 73500 frames.
Error rate monitor commands
83
CXD3048R
Command
CLV CTRL
Data 1
D3
D2
D1
D0
0
TB
TP
Gain
CLVS
See "$CX commands".
$DX commands
Command bit
TB = 0
TB = 1
TP = 0
TP = 1
Bottom hold at a cycle of RFCK/32 in CLVS mode.
Bottom hold at a cycle of RFCK/16 in CLVS mode.
Peak hold at a cycle of RFCK/4 in CLVS mode.
Peak hold at a cycle of RFCK/2 in CLVS mode.
Description
Command
CLV CTRL
Command bit
VP0 to VP7
Sets the spindle rotational velocity.
Processing
Data 2
Data 3
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
D0
VP7
VP6
VP5
VP4
VP3
VP2
VP1
VP0
Data 4
D3
D2
D1
D0
VP
CTL1
VP
CTL0
0
0
The settings in CAV-W mode are as follows.
Command bit
VPCTL1
The setting of VP0 to VP7 is multiplied by 1.
The setting of VP0 to VP7 is multiplied by 2.
The setting of VP0 to VP7 is multiplied by 3.
The setting of VP0 to VP7 is multiplied by 4.
VPCTL0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
Processing
The above setting should be "0", "0" except for the CAV-W operating mode.
84
CXD3048R
F0
E0
0.5
1
1.5
2
R Relativ
e v
elocity [m
ultiple]
VP0 to VP7 setting value [h]
D0
2.5
3
C0
3.5
4
DSPB = 0
DSPB = 1
The rotational velocity R of the spindle can be expressed with the following equation.
R =
l
R: Relative velocity at normal speed = 1
n: VP0 to VP7 setting value
l: Multiple set by VPCTL0, VPCTL1
Command bit
VP0 to VP7 = F0 (h)
:
VP0 to VP7 = E0 (h)
:
VP0 to VP7 = C0 (h)
Playback at half (normal) speed
to
Playback at normal (double) speed
to
Playback at (quadruple) speed
Description
Notes) 1. Values when crystal is 16.9344MHz and XTSL is low or when crystal is 33.8688MHz and XTSL is high.
2. Values in parentheses are for when DSPB is "1".
256 n
32
85
CXD3048R
Command bit
VPCTL1 to VPCTL0,
VP7 to VP0
Sets the pitch for variable pitch mode.
Processing
The settings in variable pitch mode are as follows.
The pitch setting can be expressed with the following equation.
P = [%]
P: Pitch setting value
n: VPCTL1 and VPCTL0, VP7 to VP0 setting value (two's complement,
VPCTL1 = sign bit)
n
10
Command bit
VPCTL1
1
1
0
0
VPCTL0
0
1
0
1
VP7 to VP0
00 (H)
--
FF (H)
00 (H)
--
FF (H)
00 (H)
--
FF (H)
00 (H)
--
E7 (H)
Pitch setting value [%]
+51.2
to
+25.7
+25.6
to
+0.1
0.0
to
25.5
25.6
to
48.7
Command setting
example
$D60080
:
$D6FF80
$D600C0
:
$D6FFC0
$D60000
:
$D6FF00
$D60040
:
$D6E740
The pitch setting range is from 48.7 to +51.2%.
The plus pitch setting should not exceed the playback speed given in the Recommended Operating Conditions.
An example of variable pitch mode commands is shown below.
$EX001 (Sets INV VPCO = 1.)
$AE4
(Setting to enable variable pitch mode.)
$AEC
(Turns on variable pitch mode. The internal clock uses the VCO2 reference.)
$D60A00 (Sets the pitch to 1.0%.)
$D60000 (Sets the pitch to 0.0%.)
$AE4
(Turns off variable pitch mode. The internal clock uses the crystal reference.)
86
CXD3048R
Command
SPD mode
Data 1
Data 2
D3
D2
D1
D0
D3
D2
D1
D0
CM3
CM2
CM1
CM0 EPWM SPDC ICAP
SFSL
Data 3
D3
D2
D1
D0
VC2C HIFC LPWR VPON
Command bit
CM3
Spindle stop mode.
1
Spindle forward rotation mode.
1
Spindle reverse rotation mode. Valid only when LPWR = 0
in any mode.
1
Rough servo mode. When the RF-PLL circuit isn't locked,
this mode is used to pull the disc rotations within the RF-
PLL capture range.
PLL servo mode.
Automatic CLVS/CLVP switching mode.
Used for normal playback.
0
1
1
1
1
0
Description
1
See Timing Charts 1-6 to 1-29.
In the digital CLV servo, the sampling frequency of the internal digital filter is switched simultaneously with
the switching of CLVP/CLVS.
Then, the CLVS mode cut-off frequency fc is 70Hz when $D command TB = 0 or 140Hz when $D command
TB = 1.
Spindle control can be set to the ternary output of only MDP or the binary outputs of MDP and MDS by
$AF commands MDPOUTSL1 and MDPOUTSL0.
$EX commands
CM2
0
0
0
1
1
1
CM1
0
0
1
1
1
1
CM0
0
0
0
0
1
0
Mode
STOP
KICK
BRAKE
CLVS
CLVP
CLVA
Command bit
EPWM
Crystal reference CLV
servo.
VCO2 reference CLV
servo.
Used for playback in
CLV-W mode.
2
Spindle control with
VP0 to VP7.
Spindle control with the
external PWM.
VCO control
3
0
0
0
0
1
0
Description
Mode
CLV-N
CLV-N
CLV-W
CAV-W
CAV-W
VCO-C
SPDC
0
0
0
1
0
0
ICAP
0
0
0
1
1
0
SFSL
0
0
0
0
0
0
VC2C
0
0
1
0
0
0
HIFC
0
0
1
1
1
1
LPWR
0
0
0
0
0
0
VPON
0
0
0
1
1
1
INV
VPCO
0
1
0
0
0
1
2
Figs. 3-1 and 3-2 show the control flow with the microcomputer software in CLV-W mode.
3
Fig. 3-3 shows the control flow with the microcomputer software in VCO-C mode.
87
CXD3048R
Mode
Timing chart
Binary output
Timing chart
Ternary output
LPWR
LPWR2
Command
CLV-N
CLV-W
CAV-W
1-18 (a)
1-18 (b)
1-18 (c)
1-19 (a)
1-19 (b)
1-19 (c)
1-20 (a)
1-20 (b)
1-20 (c)
1-21 (a)
1-21 (b)
1-21 (c)
1-22 (a)
1-22 (b)
1-22 (c)
1-6 (a)
1-6 (b)
1-6 (c)
1-7 (a)
1-7 (b)
1-7 (c)
1-8 (a)
1-8 (b)
1-8 (c)
1-9 (a)
1-9 (b)
1-9 (c)
1-10 (a)
1-10 (b)
1-10 (c)
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
Mode
Timing chart
Binary output
Timing chart
Ternary output
LPWR
LPWR2
CLV-N
CLV-W
CAV-W
1-23
1-24
1-25
1-26 (EPWM = 0)
1-27 (EPWM = 0)
1-28 (EPWM = 1)
1-29 (EPWM = 1)
1-11
1-12
1-13
1-14 (EPWM = 0)
1-15 (EPWM = 0)
1-16 (EPWM = 1)
1-17 (EPWM = 1)
0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
88
CXD3048R
Mode
Timing chart
Binary output
Timing chart
Ternary output
LPWR
LPWR2
Command
CLV-W
CAV-W
1-30 (a)
1-30 (b)
1-30 (c)
1-31 (a)
1-31 (b)
1-31 (c)
1-32 (a)
1-32 (b)
1-32 (c)
1-33 (a)
1-33 (b)
1-33 (c)
1-8 (a)
1-8 (b)
1-8 (c)
1-8 (a)
1-8 (b)
1-8 (c)
1-10 (a)
1-10 (b)
1-10 (c)
1-10 (a)
1-10 (b)
1-10 (c)
0
1
0
1
1
1
1
1
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
KICK
BRAKE
STOP
Mode
Timing chart
Binary output
Timing chart
Ternary output
LPWR
LPWR2
CLV-W
CAV-W
1-34
1-35
1-36 (EPWM = 0)
1-37 (EPWM = 0)
1-38 (EPWM = 1)
1-39 (EPWM = 1)
1-13
1-13
1-15 (EPWM = 0)
1-15 (EPWM = 0)
1-17 (EPWM = 1)
1-17 (EPWM = 1)
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
1
Command
SPD mode
Data 4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Gain
CAV1
Gain
CAV0
0
INV
VPCO
See page 86.
Gain
CAV1
0
0
1
1
Gain
CAV0
0
1
0
1
Gain
0dB
6dB
12dB
18dB
This sets the gain when controlling the spindle with VP7 to
VP0 in CAV-W mode.
Note) The Gain CAV1 and Gain CAV0 commands are invalid
for spindle control with the external PWM.
89
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-3
Rch 16-bit C2 Pointer
Lch 16-bit C2 Pointer
If C2 Pointer = 1,
data is NG
C2 Pointer for upper 8 bits
C2 Pointer for lower 8 bits
Rch C2 Pointer
C2 Pointer for upper 8 bits
C2 Pointer for lower 8 bits
Lch C2 Pointer
LRCK
WDCK
CDROM = 0
C2PO
CDROM = 1
C2PO
48 bit slot
90
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-4
Level Meter Timing
96 clock pulses
WFCK
1
2
3
96 clock pulses
CRCF
CRCF
1
2
3
Peak data of this section
16 bits
R/L
L/R
96-bit data
Hold section
1
2
3
80
81
96
CRCF
SQCK
D0
D1
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D13
D14
L/R
Peak data
L/R flag
Subcode Q data
See "Subcode Interface"
15-bit peak data
Absolute value display, LSB first
750ns to 120s
SQCK
SQSO
SQSO
91
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-5
Measurement
Peak Meter Timing
96 clock pulses
CRCF
WFCK
1
2
3
Measurement
Measurement
96 clock pulses
CRCF
CRCF
1
2
3
SQCK
92
CXD3048R
Ternary output from MDP pin ($AF MDPOUTSL1 = 0, MDPOUTSL0 = 0)
Timing Chart 1-6
CLV-N mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
MDP
H
(a) KICK
BRAKE
MDP
(b) BRAKE
STOP
MDP
(c) STOP
Z
Z
L
Z
Timing Chart 1-7
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
MDP
H
(a) KICK
BRAKE
MDP
(b) BRAKE
STOP
MDP
(c) STOP
Z
Z
L
Z
Timing Chart 1-8
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
MDP
H
(a) KICK
BRAKE
MDP
(b) BRAKE
Z
STOP
MDP
(c) STOP
Z
Z
Timing Chart 1-9
CAV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
MDP
H
(a) KICK
BRAKE
MDP
(b) BRAKE
STOP
MDP
(c) STOP
Z
L
Timing Chart 1-10
CAV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
MDP
H
(a) KICK
BRAKE
MDP
(b) BRAKE
Z
STOP
MDP
(c) STOP
Z
93
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-11
CLV-N mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
MDP
Acceleration
Z
Deceleration
132kHz
7.6s
n 236 (ns) n = 0 to 31
Timing Chart 1-12
CLV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
MDP
Acceleration
Z
Deceleration
264kHz
3.8s
Timing Chart 1-13
CLV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
MDP
Acceleration
Z
264kHz
3.8s
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.
Timing Chart 1-14
CAV-W mode EPWM = LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
MDP
Acceleration
Z
Deceleration
264kHz
3.8s
Timing Chart 1-15
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
MDP
Acceleration
Z
264kHz
3.8s
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.
94
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-16
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
PWMI
MDP
H
L
H
L
Acceleration
Deceleration
Timing Chart 1-17
CAV-W mode EPWM = LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
PWMI
MDP
H
L
H
Z
Acceleration
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.
Binary output from MDP and MDS pins ($AF MDPOUTSL1 = 1, MDPOUTSL0 = 0)
Timing Chart 1-18
CLV-N mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
MDS
MDP
H
(a) KICK
BRAKE
MDS
MDP
(b) BRAKE
STOP
MDS
MDP
(c) STOP
L
H
L
L
L
H
Timing Chart 1-19
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
MDS
MDP
H
(a) KICK
BRAKE
MDS
MDP
(b) BRAKE
STOP
MDS
MDP
(c) STOP
L
H
L
L
L
H
95
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-20
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
MDS
MDP
H
BRAKE
MDS
MDP
STOP
MDS
MDP
L
L
L
H
Timing Chart 1-21
CAV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
MDS
MDP
H
(a) KICK
H
BRAKE
MDS
MDP
(b) BRAKE
STOP
MDS
MDP
(c) STOP
L
L
H
Timing Chart 1-22
CAV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
KICK
MDS
MDP
H
(a) KICK
BRAKE
MDS
MDP
(b) BRAKE
STOP
MDS
MDP
(c) STOP
L
L
H
96
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-23
CLV-N mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
MDS
MDP
Acceleration
Deceleration
132kHz
7.6s
n 236 (ns) n = 0 to 31
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1
L
H
Timing Chart 1-24
CLV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
MDS
MDP
Acceleration
L
Deceleration
264kHz
3.8s
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1
L
Timing Chart 1-25
CLV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
MDS
MDP
Acceleration
L
264kHz
3.8s
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.
H
Timing Chart 1-26
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
MDP
Acceleration
L
Deceleration
264kHz
3.8s
MDS
L
97
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-27
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR=1, LPWR2 = 0
MDP
Acceleration
L
264kHz
3.8s
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.
MDS
H
Timing Chart 1-28
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 0
PWMI
MDP
H
L
H
L
Acceleration
Deceleration
MDS
H
Timing Chart 1-29
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 0
PWMI
H
L
MDP
H
Acceleration
MDS
H
98
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-30
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1
KICK
MDS
MDP
H
(a) KICK
BRAKE
MDS
MDP
(b) BRAKE
STOP
MDS
MDP
(c) STOP
Z
H
Z
L
Z
H
Timing Chart 1-31
CLV-W mode (when following the spindle rotational velocity) LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 1
KICK
MDS
MDP
H
BRAKE
MDS
MDP
STOP
MDS
MDP
Z
Z
Z
H
(a) KICK
(b) BRAKE
(c) STOP
Timing Chart 1-32
CAV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1
KICK
MDS
MDP
H
(a) KICK
H
BRAKE
MDS
MDP
(b) BRAKE
STOP
MDS
MDP
(c) STOP
Z
L
H
Timing Chart 1-33
CAV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 1
KICK
MDS
MDP
H
(a) KICK
BRAKE
MDS
MDP
(b) BRAKE
STOP
MDS
MDP
(c) STOP
Z
Z
H
99
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-34
CLV-W mode LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1
MDS
MDP
Acceleration
Z
Deceleration
264kHz
3.8s
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1
Timing Chart 1-35
CLV-W mode LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 1
MDS
MDP
Acceleration
Z
264kHz
3.8s
Output waveforms with DCLV = 1
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.
H
Timing Chart 1-36
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1
MDP
Acceleration
Z
Deceleration
264kHz
3.8s
MDS
L
100
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 1-37
CAV-W mode EPWM = 0, LPWR=1, LPWR2 = 1
MDP
Acceleration
Z
264kHz
3.8s
The BRAKE pulse is masked when LPWR = 1.
MDS
H
Timing Chart 1-38
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 0, LPWR2 = 1
PWMI
MDP
H
L
H
L
Acceleration
Deceleration
MDS
H
Timing Chart 1-39
CAV-W mode EPWM = 1, LPWR = 1, LPWR2 = 1
PWMI
H
L
MDP
H
Acceleration
MDS
H
Z
101
CXD3048R
[2] Subcode Interface
There are two methods for reading out a subcode externally.
The 8-bit subcodes P to W can be read out from SBSO by inputting EXCK.
The subcode-Q can be read out after checking CRC of the 80 bits in the subcode frame.
The subcode-Q can be read out from the SQSO pin by inputting 80 clock pulses to the SQCK pin when SCOR
comes correctly and CRCF is high.
2-1. P to W Subcode Readout
Data can be read out by inputting EXCK immediately after WFCK falls. (See Timing Chart 2-1.)
2-2. 80-bit Subcode-Q Readout
Fig. 2-2 shows the peripheral block of the 80-bit subcode-Q register.
First, subcode-Q, regenerated at one bit per frame, is input to the 80-bit serial/parallel register and the CRC
check circuit.
96-bit subcode-Q is input, and if the CRC is OK, it is output to SQSO with CRCF = 1. In addition, 80 bits are
loaded into the parallel/serial register.
When SQSO goes high after SCOR is output, the CPU determines that new data (which passed the CRC
check) has been loaded.
When the 80-bit data is loaded, the order of the MSB and LSB is inverted within each byte. As a result,
although the sequence of the bytes is the same, the bits within the bytes are now ordered LSB first.
Once the 80-bit data load is confirmed, SQCK is input so that the data can be read.
The SQCK input is detected, and the retriggerable monostable multivibrator is reset while the input is low.
The retriggerable monostable multivibrator has a time constant from 270 to 400s. When the duration when
SQCK is high is less than this time constant, the monostable multivibrator is kept reset; during this interval,
the serial/parallel register is not loaded into the parallel/serial register.
While the monostable multivibrator is being reset, data cannot be loaded in the peak detection parallel/serial
register or the 80-bit parallel/serial register.
In other words, while reading out with a clock cycle shorter than this time constant, these registers will not be
rewritten by CRCOK and others.
The previously mentioned peak detection register can be connected to the shift-in of the 80-bit parallel/serial
register.
For ring control 1, input and output are shorted during peak meter and level meter modes.
For ring control 2, input and output are shorted during peak meter mode.
This is because the register is reset with each readout in level meter mode, and to prevent readout
destruction in peak meter mode.
As a result, the 96-bit clock must be input in peak meter mode.
The absolute time after peak is stored in the memory in peak meter mode as noted in "Description of peak
meter mode" on page 95. See Timing Chart 2-3.
The clock is input from the SQCK pin to perform these operations. The high and low intervals of the clock
should be between 750ns and 120s.
102
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 2-1
Internal
PLL clock
4.3218
MHz
WFCK
SCOR
EXCK
SBSO
750ns max
S0 S1
Q
R
WFCK
SCOR
EXCK
SBSO
S0S1 Q R S
T
U V W S0S1
P1
Q R S
T U V W
P1
P2
P3
Same
Same
Subcode P.Q.R.S.T.U.V.W Read Timing
103
CXD3048R
Block Diagram 2-2
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
Order
Inversion
16
Peak detection
LOAD CONTROL
Ring control 2
CRCF
Mix
Monostable
multivibrator
CRCC
ABS time load control
for peak value
16-bit P/S register
Ring control 1
SO
SI
SQSO
SQCK
SHIFT
SHIFT
SUBQ
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
LD
SO
H G F E D C B A
A B C D E F G H
SI
80-bit P/S Register
80-bit S/P Register
(AFRAM)
(ASEC)
(AMIN)
ADDRS CTRL
SIN
SUBQ
104
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 2-3
1
2
3
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
WFCK
SCOR
SQSO
SQCK
Monostable
multivibrator
(Internal)
CRCF1
Determined by mode
CRCF2
80 or 96 Clock
Register load forbidder
270 to 400 when SQCK = high.
750ns to 120s
300ns max
CRCF
ADR0
ADR1
ADR2
ADR3
CTL0
CTL1
CTL2
CTL3
SQCK
SQSO
1
2
3
CRCF1
105
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 2-4
Example: $802000 latch
Set SQCK high during this interval.
Internal signal latch
PER0
PER1
PER2
PER3
PER4
PER5
PER6
PER7
C1F0
C1F1
C1F2
C2F0
C2F1
C2F2
FOK
GFS
LOCK
EMPH
750ns or more
XLAT
SQCK
SQSO
ALOCK
VF0
VF1
VF2
VF3
VF4
VF5
VF6
VF9
VF7
VF8
Signal
PER0 to PER7
FOK
GFS
LOCK
EMPH
ALOCK
VF0 to VF9
Description
RF jitter amount (used to adjust the focus bias). 8-bit binary data in PER0 = LSB, PER7 = MSB.
Focus OK.
High when the frame sync and the insertion protection timing match.
GFS is sampled at 460Hz; when GFS is high, this pin outputs a high signal. If GFS is low eight consecutive samples, this pin
outputs low.
High when the playback disc has emphasis.
GFS is sampled at 460Hz; when GFS is high eight consecutive samples, this pin outputs a high signal. If GFS is low eight
consecutive samples, this pin outputs low.
Used in CAV-W mode. The result obtained by measuring the rotational velocity of the disc. (See Timing Chart 2-5.) VF0 = LSB,
VF9 = MSB.
C1F2
No C1 errors; C1 pointer reset
One C1 error corrected; C1 pointer reset
--
--
No C1 errors; C1 pointer set
One C1 error corrected; C1 pointer set
Two C1 errors corrected; C1 pointer set
C1 correction impossible; C1 pointer set
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
Description
C1F1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
C1F0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
C2F2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
No C2 errors; C2 pointer reset
One C2 error corrected; C2 pointer reset
Two C2 errors corrected; C2 pointer reset
Three C2 errors corrected; C2 pointer reset
Four C2 errors corrected; C2 pointer reset
--
C2 correction impossible; C1 pointer copy
C2 correction impossible; C2 pointer set
Description
C2F1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
C2F0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
106
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 2-5
Measurement interval (approximately 3.8s)
Reference window
(132.2kHz)
Measurement pulse
(V16M/2)
Measurement counter
VF0 to VF9
Load
m
The relative velocity of the disc can be obtained with the following equation.
R = (R: Relative velocity, m: Measurement results)
VF0 to VF9 is the result obtained by counting V16M/2 pulses while the reference signal (132.2kHz) generated
from XTAL (XTAI, XTAO) (384Fs) is high. This value is 31 when the disc is rotating at normal speed and 63
when it is rotating at double speed (when DSPB is low).
m + 1
32
VF0
VF1
VF2
VF3
VF4
VF5
VF6
VF7
VF8
VF9
"H" or "L"
XLAT
SQCK
SQSO
Set SQCK high during this period.
750ns or more
107
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 2-6
18 17
C1 MSB 19
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
0
5
3
7
0
0
5
3
7
0
C1 error rate
C2 error rate
XLAT
SQCK
SQSO
108
CXD3048R
[3] Description of Modes
This LSI has three basic operating modes using a combination of spindle control and the PLL. The operations
for each mode are described below.
3-1. CLV-N Mode
This mode is compatible with the CXD2510Q, and operation is the same as for conventional control. The PLL
capture range is 150kHz.
3-2. CLV-W Mode
This is the wide capture range mode. This mode allows the conventional PLL to follow the rotational velocity of
the disc. This rotational following control uses the built-in VCO2. The spindle is the same CLV servo as for the
conventional series. Operation using the built-in VCO2 is described below.
When starting to rotate the disc and/or speeding up to the lock range from the condition where the disc is
stopped, CAV-W mode should be used. Specifically, first send $E665X to set CAV-W mode and kick the disc,
then send $E60CX to set CLV-W mode if ALOCK is high, which can be read out serially from the SQSO pin.
CLV-W mode can be used while ALOCK is high. The microcomputer monitors the serial data output, and must
return the operation to the speed adjusting state (CAV-W mode) when ALOCK becomes low. The control flow
according to the microcomputer software in CLV-W mode is shown in Fig. 3-2.
In CLV-W mode (normal), low power consumption is achieved by setting LPWR high. Control was formerly
performed by applying acceleration and deceleration pulses to the spindle motor. However, when LPWR is set
high, deceleration pulses are not output, thereby achieving low power consumption mode.
Note) The capture range for this mode is theoretically up to the signal processing limit.
3-3. CAV-W Mode
This is CAV mode. In this mode, the external clock is fixed and it is possible to control the spindle to the
desired rotational velocity. The rotational velocity is determined by the VP0 to VP7 setting values or the
external PWM. When controlling the spindle with VP0 to VP7, setting CAV-W mode with the $E665X command
and controlling VP0 to VP7 with the $DX commands allows the rotational velocity to be varied from low speed
to quadruple speed. (See "$DX commands".) When controlling the spindle with the external PWM, the PWMI
pin is binary input which becomes KICK during high intervals and BRAKE during low intervals.
The microcomputer can know the rotational velocity using the internal master clock frequency as the
parameter. With XTAL (XTAI, XTAO) (384Fs) as the reference frequency, the result after measuring the high
interval by the internal master clock is output in 10 bits (VP0 to VP9) from the new CPU interface. These
measurement results are 31 when the disc is rotating at normal speed or 127 when it is rotating at quadruple
speed. These values match those of the 256 n for control with VP0 to VP7. (See Timing Chart 2-5.)
In CAV-W mode, the spindle is set to the desired rotational velocity and the operation speed for the entire
system follows this rotational velocity. Therefore, the cycles for the Fs system clock, PCM data and all other
output signals from this LSI change according to the rotational velocity of the disc.
Note) The capture range for this mode is theoretically up to the signal processing limit.
Note) Set FLFC to "1" for this mode
109
CXD3048R
3-4. VCO-C Mode
This is VCO control mode. In this mode, the oscillation frequency of the internal master clock (VCLK) can be
controlled by setting $D commands VP0 to VP7 and VPCTL0, 1. The VCLK oscillation frequency can be
expressed by the following equation.
VCLK =
The VCO1 oscillation frequency is determined by VCLK. The VCO1 frequency can be expressed by the
following equation.
When DSPB = 0
VCO1 = VCLK
When DSPB = 1
VCO1 = VCLK
1 (256 n)
32
49
24
49
16
n: VP0 to VP7 setting value
1: VPCTL0, 1 setting value
110
CXD3048R
NO
YES
KICK $E8000
Mute OFF $A00XXXX
ALOCK = H ?
NO
YES
ALOCK = L ?
CLV-W MODE
START
CAV-W $E665X
(CLVA)
CLV-W $E60CX
(CLVA)
(WFCK PLL)
CAV-W
CLVS
CLV-W
CLVP
Rotational velocity
Target speed
Operation mode
Spindle mode
Time
KICK
LOCK
ALOCK
Fig. 3-1. Disc Stop to Regular Playback in CLV-W Mode
CLV-W Mode
Fig. 3-2. CLV-W Mode Flow Chart
111
CXD3048R
R?
(How many minutes
of absolute time?)
Access START
Transfer
$E00510
n?
(Calculate n)
Transfer
$DX XX
Track Jump
Subroutine
Transfer
$E66500
Access END
What is the playback speed when access ends?
Calculate VP0 to VP7.
Switch to VCO control mode.
EPWM = SPDC = ICAP = SFSL = VC2C = LPWR = 0
HIFC = VPON = 1
Transfer VP0 to VP7. ( corresponds to VP0 to VP7.)
Switch to normal-speed playback mode.
EPWM = SFSL = VC2C = LPWR = 0
SPDC = ICAP = HIFC = VPON = 1
VCO-C Mode
Fig. 3-3. Access Flow Chart Using VCO Control
112
CXD3048R
[4] Description of other functions
4-1. Channel Clock Recovery by Digital PLL Circuit
The channel clock is necessary for demodulating the EFM signal regenerated by the optical system.
Assuming T as the channel clock cycle, the EFM signal is modulated in an integer multiple of T from 3T to
11T.
In order to read the information in the EFM signal, this integer value must be read correctly. As a result, T,
that is the channel clock, is necessary.
In an actual player, a PLL is necessary to recover the channel clock because the fluctuation in the spindle
rotation alters the width of the EFM signal pulses.
The block diagram of this PLL is shown in Fig. 4-1.
The CXD3048R has a built-in three-stage PLL.
The first-stage PLL is a wide-band PLL. When using the internal VCO2, an external LPF is necessary.
The output of this first-stage PLL is used as a reference for all clocks within the LSI.
The second-stage PLL generates the high-frequency clock needed by the third-stage digital PLL.
The third-stage PLL is a digital PLL that recovers the actual channel clock.
The digital PLL in CLV-N mode has a secondary loop, and is controlled by the primary loop (phase) and the
secondary loop (frequency). When FLFC = 1, the secondary loop can be turned off. High frequency
components such as 3T and 4T may contain deviations. In such cases, turning the secondary loop off yields
better playability. However, in this case the capture range becomes 50kHz.
A new digital PLL has been provided for CLV-W mode to follow the rotational velocity of the disc in addition to
the conventional secondary loop.
113
CXD3048R
Block Diagram 4-1
XTSL
1/2
1/32
1/n
1/2
Microcomputer
control
n = 1 to 256
(VP7 to 0)
1/K
(KSL1, KSL0)
CLV-W
CAV-W
Spindle rotation information
CLV-N
CLV-W
CAV-W
/CLV-N
Phase compar
ator
Selector
LPF
2/1 MUX
VPON
1/M
1/N
VCOSEL2
VCO2
Phase compar
ator
VCO1
VCOSEL1
1/K
(KSL3, KSL2)
Digital PLL
RFPLL
VPCO
VCTL
PCO
FILI
FILO
CLTV
XTAI
Clock input
1/l
l = 1, 2, 3, 4
(VPCTL0, 1)
114
CXD3048R
4-2. Frame Sync Protection
In normal-speed playback, a frame sync is recorded approximately every 136s (7.35kHz). This signal is
used as a reference to recognize the data within a frame. Conversely, if the frame sync cannot be
recognized, the data is processed as error data because the data cannot be recognized. As a result,
recognizing the frame sync properly is extremely important for improving playability.
In the CXD3048R, window protection and forward protection/backward protection have been adopted for
frame sync protection. These functions achieve very powerful frame sync protection. There are two window
widths; one for cases where a rotational disturbance affects the player and the other for cases where there is
no rotational disturbance (WSEL = 0/1). In addition, the forward protection counter is set to 12
, and the
backward protection counter to 3
. Concretely, when the frame sync is being played back normally and then
cannot be detected due to scratches, etc., a maximum of 12 frames are inserted. If the frame sync cannot be
detected for 13 frames or more, the window opens to resynchronize the frame sync.
In addition, immediately after the window opens and the resynchronization is executed, if a proper frame
sync cannot be detected within 3 frames, the window opens immediately.
Default values. These values can be set as desired by $C commands SFP3 to SFP0 and SRP3 to SRP0.
4-3. Error Correction
In the CD format, one 8-bit data contains two error correction codes, C1 and C2. For C1 correction, the code
is created with 28-byte information and 4-byte C1 parity.
For C2 correction, the code is created with 24-byte information and 4-byte parity.
Both C1 and C2 are Reed-Solomon codes with a minimum distance of 5.
The CXD3048R uses refined super strategy to achieve double correction for C1 and quadruple correction for
C2.
In addition, to prevent C2 miscorrection, a C1 pointer is attached to data after C1 correction according to the
C1 error status, the playback status of the EFM signal and the operating status of the player.
The correction status can be monitored externally.
See Table 4-2.
When the C2 pointer is high, the data in question was uncorrectable. Either the pre-value was held or an
average value interpolation was made for the data.
MNT3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
MNT2
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
MNT1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
MNT0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
Description
No C1 errors;
C1 pointer reset
One C1 error corrected;
C1 pointer reset
--
--
No C1 errors;
C1 pointer set
One C1 error corrected;
C1 pointer set
Two C1 errors corrected;
C1 pointer set
C1 correction impossible;
C1 pointer set
No C2 errors;
C2 pointer reset
One C2 error corrected;
C2 pointer reset
Two C2 errors corrected;
C2 pointer reset
Three C2 errors corrected;
C2 pointer reset
Four C2 errors corrected;
C2 pointer reset
--
C2 correction impossible;
C1 pointer copy
C2 correction impossible;
C2 pointer set
Table 4-2.
115
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 4-3
Normal-speed PB
400 to 500ns
RFCK
MNT3
MNT1
MNT0
t = Dependent on error
condition
C1 correction
C2 correction
Strobe
Strobe
MNT2
4-4. DA Interface
The DA interface supports the 48-bit slot interface.
48-bit slot interface
This interface includes 48 cycles of the bit clock within one LRCK cycle, and is MSB first.
When LRCK is high, the data is for the left channel.
The output format from the bass boost block supports 18 bits and 20 bits in addition to 16 bits.
116
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 4-4
LRCK
(44.1K)
BCK
(2.12M)
WDCK
PCMD
LRCK
(88.2K)
BCK
(4.23M)
WDCK
PCMD
48-bit Slot Normal-speed Playback
1
24
R0
Lch MSB (15)
L14
L13
L12
L11
L10
L9
L8
L7
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
L0
Rch MSB
Lch MSB (15)
24
Rch MSB
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
48-bit Slot Double-speed Playback
1
2
L0
R0
117
CXD3048R
Timing Chart 4-5 (DAC output selected)
LRCK
(44.1K)
BCK
(2.12M)
WDCK
PCMD
SDSL1 = 1, OBIT1 = 0, OBIT0 = 1
1
24
R0
Lch MSB (17)
L14
L13
L12
L11
L10
L9
L8
L7
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
L0
Rch MSB
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
SDSL = 1, OBIT1 = 0, OBIT0 = 0
PCMD
R0
Lch MSB (19)
L14
L13
L12
L11
L10
L9
L8
L7
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
L0
Rch MSB
L15
L16
L15
L16
L17
L18
118
CXD3048R
4-5. Digital Out
There are three Digital Out: the type 1 format for broadcasting stations, the type 2 form 1 format for home use,
and the type 2 form 2 format for the manufacture of software.
The CXD3048R supports type 2 form 1.
This LSI supports two kinds of Digital Out generation methods; generation from the PCM data read out from
the disc, and generation from the DA interface inputs (PCMDI, LRCKI, BCKI).
The timing accuracy of output data depends on the signal accuracy input
to XTAI, XTAO pins in CLV-N mode, and the built-in VCO accuracy in VCO-C mode.
4-5-1. Digital Out from PCM Data
The Digital Out is generated from the PCM data which is read out from the disc.
The clock accuracy of the channel status is automatically set to level
II
when the crystal clock is used and to
level
III
in CAV-W mode, VCO-C mode or variable pitch mode. In addition, the subcode-Q data matched twice
in succession with CRC check are input to the initial 4 bits (bits 0 to 3).
DOUT is output when the crystal is 34MHz and XTSL is high in CLV-N or CLV-W mode with DSPB = 1.
Therefore, DOUT is set to off by setting the $B command MD2 to "0".
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0/1
0 0
0
ID0
ID1 COPY Emph
0 0 0 0 1
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
From sub Q
0
16
32
48
176
Subcode-Q control bits that matched twice in succesion with CRCOK
Digital Out C bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
VPON or VARION: 1
Crystal: 0
bit0 to 3
bit29
Table 4-5-1.
119
CXD3048R
4-5-2. Digital Out from DA Interface Input
The Digital Out is generated from the DA interface input.
Validity Flag and User Data
The Validity Flag is fixed to "0".
The User Data is fixed to "0" or it can be output according to the format by setting 0 data.
For the Q data, first set the Q1 to Q80 data using the $A90 to $A99 commands, then the set data can be
output according to the digital interface format using the $A9A command. In addition, CRC operations are
performed internally on the Q81 to Q96 data and then this data is output.
The data is output in the order shown in Table 4-5-2.
The setting flow is shown in Figs. 4-5 (a) and 4-5 (b). Fig. 4-5 (a) shows the case when changing all the data,
and Fig. 4-5 (b) the case when changing the INDEX, movement time and absolute time.
0
12
24
36
48
:
1164
0
0
0
1
1
1
:
1
1
0
0
Q1
Q2
Q3
:
Q96
2
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
3
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
4
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
5
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
6
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
7
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
8
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
9
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
10
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
11
0
0
0
0
0
:
0
Table 4-5-2.
120
CXD3048R
Channel Status Data
For the Channel Status Data, bits 0, 6 and 7 are fixed to "0". The following items can be set by bits 1, 2, 3 and 8.
a) Digital data/audio data
b) Digital copy enabled/prohibited
c) With/without emphasis
d) Category code (2 types possible)
0
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0 0
0
0
A/D
SEL
COPY
En
EMPH
D
0 0 0 0
CAT
b8
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
0
16
32
48
176
Digital Out C bit
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
Table 4-5-3.
Note) In this method, DOUT can be set to off by setting $B command MD2 to "0" and $34A command
DOUT EN to "0".
121
CXD3048R
START
$A900
:
$A990
$A9A0F0
(DON = H, DUP1 = H, DUP0 = H)
Set the subcode-Q information.
Input with BCD code.
Wait time 13.3ms
Output the subcode-Q information.
Start the movement time and absolute time counts.
$A9A040
(DON = L, DUP1 = L, DUP0 = L)
Stop subcode-Q information output to D-out.
Stop the movement time and absolute time counts.
$A900
:
$A990
Wait time 13.3ms
Input $A9A0F0
(DON = H, DUP1 = H, DUP0 = H)
(Output the changed subcode-Q information.)
Set the subcode-Q information.
Input with BCD code.
Fig. 4-5(a). Flow Chart for Settings Using Q Data
START
$A900
:
$A990
$A9A0F0
(DON = H, DUP1 = H, DUP0 = H)
Set the subcode-Q information.
Input with BCD code.
Wait time 13.3ms
Output the subcode-Q information.
Start the movement time and absolute time counts.
$A9A0C8
(DUP1 = L, DUP0 = L, DLD = H)
(Stop the movement time and absolute time counts.)
$A920
INDEX
$A930
:
Movement
time
$A950
$A970
:
Absolute
time
$A990
Wait time 13.3ms
Input $A9A0F0
(DUP1 = H, DUP0 = H, DLD = L)
(Output the changed subcode-Q information.)
Note) The INDEX, movement and absolute time data
output to D-out while making the settings is all "0".
Fig. 4-5(b). Flow Chart for Settings Using Q Data
122
CXD3048R
Digital Audio Data Input
The input signal of the digital audio data is input through the DAC input signal pins PCMDI, LRCKI and BCKI.
The input format supports the 48-bit slot, MSB first.
Mute Function
By setting the command bit DOUT_DMUT to "1", all the audio data portions in the Digital Out output can be
set to "0" without altering the Channel Status Data.
Input/Output Synchronization Circuit
In normal operation, the DAC automatically synchronizes with the input LRCK. However, synchronization may
not be achieved when the input data contains much jitter or during power-on, etc. In such cases, internal
operation should be forcibly resynchronized by setting the $34A command DOUT WOD to "1". Forced
synchronization is also required when the operating frequency is changed such as switching between CLV and
CAV, etc. Be sure to set DOUT WOD to "0" and then to "1" for forced resynchronization.
Resynchronization clears the internal frame counter so that the count starts over from frame 0 after the
resynchronization processing. In cases where automatic resynchronization processing is not desirable or the
user wants to do it manually, set the $34A command WINEN to "0" to disable the resynchronization circuit.
DOUT Circuit Clock System
For the DOUT block, the master clock is set using the clock control command MCSL ($A) employed by the
DAC block. Set MCSL to "1" for 768fs, and to "0" for 384fs.
123
CXD3048R
DOUT Block Input Timing Chart
LRCK
BCKI
PCMDI
48-bit slot
1
24
R0
Lch MSB (15)
L14
L13
L12
L11
L10
L9
L8
L7
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
L0
Rch MSB
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
124
CXD3048R
4-6. Servo Auto Sequence
This function performs a series of controls, including auto focus and track jumps. When the auto sequence
command is received from the CPU, auto focus, 1-track jump, 2N-track jump, fine search and M-track move
are executed automatically.
The servo block operates according to the built-in program during the auto sequence execution (when XBUSY =
low), so that commands from the CPU, that is $0, 1, 2 and 3 commands, are not accepted. ($4 to E commands
are accepted.) When the auto sequencer is used, $9X command A.SEC ON-OFF is turned on.
In addition, when using the auto sequence, turn the A.SEQ ON-OFF of register 9 on.
When CLOK goes from low to high while XBUSY is low, XBUSY does not become high for a maximum of
100s after that point. This is to prevent the transfer of erroneous data to the servo when XBUSY changes
from low to high by the monostable multivibrator, which is reset by CLOK being low (when XBUSY is low).
In addition, a MAX timer is built into this LSI as a countermeasure against abnormal operation due to external
disturbances, etc. When the auto sequence command is sent from the CPU, this command assumes a $4XY
format, in which X specifies the command and Y sets the MAX timer value and timer range. If the executed
auto sequence command does not terminate within the set timer value, the auto sequence is interrupted (like
$40). See "[1] $4X commands" concerning the timer value and range. Also, the MAX timer is invalidated by
inputting $4X0.
Although this command is explained in the format of $4X in the following command descriptions, the timer
value and timer range are actually sent together from the CPU.
(a) Auto focus ($47)
Focus search-up is performed, FOK and FZC are checked, and the focus servo is turned on.
If $47 is received from the CPU, the focus servo is turned on according to Fig. 4-6. The auto focus starts with
focus search-up, and note that the pickup should be lowered beforehand (focus search-down). In addition,
blind E of register 5 is used to eliminate FZC chattering. Concretely, the focus servo is turned on at the falling
edge of FZC after FZC has been continuously high for a longer time than E.
(b) Track jump
1, 10 and 2N-track jumps are performed respectively. Always use this when the focus, tracking, and sled
servos are on. Note that tracking gain-up and braking-on ($17) should be sent beforehand because they are
not involved in this sequence.
1-track jump
When $48 ($49 for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) 1-track jump is performed in accordance
with Fig. 4-7. Set blind A and brake B with register 5.
10-track jump
When $4A ($4B for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) 10-track jump is performed in
accordance with Fig. 4-8. The principal difference from the 1-track jump is to kick the sled. In addition, after
kicking the actuator, when 5 tracks have been counted through COUT, the brake is applied to the actuator.
Then, when the actuator speed is found to have slowed up enough (determined by the COUT cycle
becoming longer than the overflow C set with register 5), the tracking and sled servos are turned on.
125
CXD3048R
2N-track jump
When $4C ($4D for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) 2N-track jump is performed in
accordance with Fig. 4-9. The track jump count N is set with register 7. Although N can be set to 2
16
tracks,
note that the setting is actually limited by the actuator. COUT is used for counting the number of jumps
when N is less than 16, and MIRR is used when N is 16 or more.
Although the 2N-track jump basically follows the same sequence as the 10-track jump, the one difference is
that after the tracking servo is turned on, the sled continues to move only for "D", set with register 6.
Fine search
When $44 ($45 for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) fine search (N-track jump) is performed
in accordance with Fig. 4-10. The differences from a 2N-track jump are that a higher precision is achieved
by controlling the traverse speed, and a longer distance jump can be performed by controlling the sled. The
track jump count N is set with register 7. N can be set to 2
16
tracks. After kicking the actuator and sled, the
traverse speed is controlled based on the overflow G. Set kick D and F with register 6 and overflow G with
register 5. Also, sled speed control during traverse can be turned off by causing COMP to fall. Set the
number of tracks during which COMP falls with register B. After N tracks have been counted through COUT,
the brake is applied to the actuator and sled. (This is performed by turning on the tracking servo for the
actuator, and by kicking the sled in the opposite direction during the time for kick D set with register 6.)
Then, the tracking and sled servos are turned on.
Set overflow G to the speed required to slow up just before the track jump terminates. (The speed should
be such that it will come on-track when the tracking servo turns on at the termination of the track jump.) For
example, set the target track count N
for the traverse monitor counter which is set with register B, and
COMP will be monitored. When the falling edge of this COMP is detected, overflow G can be set again.
M-track move
When $4E ($4F for REV) is received from the CPU, a FWD (REV) M-track move is performed in
accordance with Fig. 4-11. M can be set to 2
16
tracks. Like the 2N-track jump, COUT is used for counting
the number of moves when M is less than 16, and MIRR is used when M is 16 or more. The M-track move
is executed by moving only the sled, and is therefore suited for moving across several thousand to several
ten-thousand tracks. In addition, the track and sled servos are turned off after M tracks have been counted
through COUT or MIRR unlike for the other jumps. Transfer $25 from the microcomputer after the actuator
has stabilized.
126
CXD3048R
Auto focus
Focus search-up
FOK = H
NO
YES
FZC = H
NO
YES
FZC = L
NO
YES
END
Focus servo ON
Check whether FZC is
continuously high for
the period of time E set
with register 5.
Fig. 4-6-(a). Auto Focus Flow Chart
XLAT
$47 Latch
$03
Blind E
$08
FOK
FZC
BUSY
Command for
DSSP block
Fig. 4-6-(b). Auto Focus Timing Chart
127
CXD3048R
1 Track
NO
YES
END
Track FWD kick
sled servo OFF
WAIT
(Blind A)
COUT =
Track REV
kick
WAIT
(Brake B)
Track, sled
servo ON
(FWD kick for REV jump)
(REV kick for REV jump)
Fig. 4-7-(a). 1-Track Jump Flow Chart
XLAT
COUT
BUSY
Command for
DSSP block
$48 (REV = $49) Latch
$28 ($2C)
Blind A
Brake B
$2C ($28)
$25
Fig. 4-7-(b). 1-Track Jump Timing Chart
128
CXD3048R
Fig. 4-8-(a). 10-Track Jump Flow Chart
COUT
$4A (REV = $4B) Latch
Blind A
$2A ($2F)
COUT 5 counts
$2E ($2B)
Overflow C
$25
XLAT
BUSY
Command for
DSSP block
Fig. 4-8-(b). 10-Track Jump Timing Chart
10 Track
NO
YES
END
Track, sled
FWD kick
WAIT
(Blind A)
COUT = 5 ?
Track, REV
kick
Track, sled
servo ON
Checks whether the COUT cycle
is linger than overflow C.
(Counts COUT
5)
NO
YES
C = Overflow ?
129
CXD3048R
2N Track
NO
YES
END
Track, sled
FWD kick
WAIT
(Blind A)
COUT (MIRR) = N
Track REV
kick
Track servo
ON
NO
YES
C = Overflow
WAIT
(Kick D)
Sled servo
ON
Counts COUT for the first 16 times
and MIRR for more times.
Fig. 4-9-(a). 2N-Track Jump Flow Chart
XLAT
Blind A
$2A ($2F)
COUT (MIRR)
N counts
$2E ($2B)
Overflow C
Kick D
$26 ($27)
$25
$4C (REV = $4D) Latch
COUT
(MIRR)
BUSY
Command for
DSSP block
Fig. 4-9-(b). 2N-Track Jump Timing Chart
130
CXD3048R
Track Servo ON
Sled FWD Kick
Fine Search
WAIT
(Kick D)
Track Sled
FWD Kick
WAIT
(Kick F)
Traverse
Speed Ctrl
(Overflow G)
COUT = N?
Track Servo ON
Sled REV Kick
WAIT
(Kick D)
Track Sled
Servo ON
END
YES
NO
Fig. 4-10-(a). Fine Search Flow Chart
Traverse Speed Control (Overflow G)
&
COUT N counts
Kick F
Kick D
$26 ($27)
$2A ($2F)
$27 ($26)
$25
$44 (REV = $45) Latch
XLAT
COUT
Kick D
BUSY
Command for
DSSP block
Fig. 4-10-(b). Fine Search Timing Chart
131
CXD3048R
M Track Move
NO
YES
END
Track Servo OFF
Sled FWD Kick
WAIT
(Blind A)
COUT (MIRR) = M
Track, Sled
Servo OFF
Counts COUT for M < 16.
Counts MIRR for M
16.
Fig. 4-11-(a). M-Track Move Flow Chart
XLAT
Blind A
$22 ($23)
COUT (MIRR)
M counts
$20
$4E (REV = $4F) Latch
COUT
(MIRR)
BUSY
Command for
DSSP block
Fig. 4-11-(b). M-Track Move Timing Chart
132
CXD3048R
4-7. Digital CLV
Fig. 4-12 shows the block diagram. Digital CLV outputs MDS error and MDP error signals with PWM, with the
sampling frequency increased up to 130kHz during normal-speed playback in CLVS, CLVP and other modes.
In addition, the digital spindle servo gain is variable.
MDP
Digital CLV
CLVS U/D
MDS Error
MDP Error
CLV P/S
Measure
Measure
2/1 MUX
Oversampling
Filter-1
Gain
MDS
1/2
Mux
CLV P/S
Oversampling
Filter-2
Noise Shape
Modulation
KICK, BRAKE, STOP
Mode Select
+
Gain
DCLV
Gain
MDP
LPWR
PWMI
CLVS U/D: Up/down signal from CLVS servo
MDS error: Frequency error for CLVP servo
MDP error: Phase error for CLVP servo
PWMI:
Spindle drive signal from the microcomputer for CAV servo
Fig. 4-12. Block Diagram
133
CXD3048R
4-8. CD-DSP Block Playback Speed
In the CXD3048R, the following playback modes can be selected through different combinations of the XTAI,
XTSL pins, double-speed command (DSPB), VCO1 selection command (VCOSEL1), VCO1 frequency division
commands (KSL3, KSL2) and command transfer rate selector (ASHS) in CLV-N or CLV-W mode.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
XTAI
768Fs
768Fs
768Fs
768Fs
384Fs
384Fs
384Fs
Mode
XTSL
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
DSPB
0
1
0
1
0
1
1
ASHS
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
Playback speed
1
2
2
4
1
2
1
Error correction
2
C1: double; C2: quadruple
C1: double; C2: double
C1: double; C2: quadruple
C1: double; C2: double
C1: double; C2: quadruple
C1: double; C2: double
C1: double; C2: double
VCOSEL1
1
0/1
0/1
1
1
0/1
0/1
0/1
1
Actually, the optimal value should be used together with KSL3 and KSL2.
2
When $8 command ERC4 = 1, C2 is quadruple correction even when DSPB = 1.
The playback speed can be varied by setting VP0 to VP7 in CAV-W mode. See "[3] Description of Modes" for
details.
4-9. Description of DAC Block and Shock-proof Memory Controller Block Circuits
The CXD3048R inputs data from the CD-DSP block to the DAC block via the shock-proof memory controller
block.
The data from the shock-proof memory controller block is output externally as bass-boosted data via the DBB
circuit.
When not using the DAC block, the data from the shock-proof memory controller block can be output directly to
the outside of the LSI.
Also, when not using the shock-proof memory controller, the data can be input directly from the CD-DSP block
to the DAC block.
The DAC block output format supports 16, 18 or 20 bits.
134
CXD3048R
4-10. DAC Block Input Timing
Fig. 4-13 shows the input timing chart to the DAC block.
The CXD3048R can transfer data from the CD-DSP block to the DAC block via an external route. This allows the data to be sent to the DAC block via an
audio DSP, etc.
Normal-speed Playback
LRCKI
(44.1k)
BCKI
(2.12M)
1
24
PCMDI
R0
Lch MSB (15)
L14
L13
L12
L11
L10
L9
L8
L7
L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1
L0
Rch MSB
PCMDI
LRCKI
(88.2k)
BCKI
(4.23M)
Double-speed Playback
24
R0
Lch MSB (15)
Rch MSB
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1
2
L0
Fig. 4-13. Input Timing to the DAC Block
135
CXD3048R
4-11. Description of DAC Block Functions
Zero Data Detection
When the condition where the lower 4 bits of the input data are DC and the remaining upper bits are all "0"
or all "1" has continued for about 300ms (16384/44.1kHz), zero data is detected. Zero data detection is
performed independently for the left and right channels.
Mute flag output
The LRMU pin goes active when any one of the following conditions is met. (when $AA command ORMU = 0)
The polarity can be selected by the $A5X command ZDPL.
When zero data is detected
When a high signal is input to the SYSM pin and the state continues for approximately 300ms
When the $A5 command SMUT is set and the state continues for approximately 300ms
Attenuation Operation
Assuming the attenuation commands X1, X2 and X3, the corresponding audio outputs are Y1, Y2 and Y3
(Y1 > Y3 > Y2). First, the command X1 is sent and then the audio output approaches Y1. When the
command X2 is sent before the audio output reaches Y1 (A in the figure), the audio output passes Y1 and
approaches Y2. And, when the command X3 is sent before the audio output reaches Y2 (B or C in the
figure), the audio output approaches Y3 from the value (B or C in the figure) at that point.
A
Y1
B
Y3
C
Y2
23.2 [ms]
000 (H)
0dB
400 (H)
DAC Block Mute Operation
Soft mute
Soft mute results and the input data is attenuated to zero when any one of the following conditions is met.
When attenuation data of 000 (h) is set
When $A5 command SMUT is set to "1"
When a high signal is input to the SYSM pin
Soft mute on
Soft mute off
Soft mute off
23.2 [ms]
23.2 [ms]
0dB
dB
136
CXD3048R
Zero detection mute
Analog mute is applied to the respective channel when $AX command ZMUTA is set to "0" and zero data is
detected for the left or right channel. (See "Zero data detection".)
When $AX command ZMUTA is set to "0", analog mute is applied even if the mute flag output condition is
met.
LRCK Synchronization
Synchronization is performed at the first rising edge of the LRCK input when reset.
After that, synchronization is lost when the LRCK input frequency changes, etc., so resynchronization must
be performed.
The LRCK input frequency changes when the master clock of the LSI is switched and the playback speed
changes such as the following cases.
When the XTSL pin switches between high and low
When the $9 command DSPB setting changes
When the $A4 command MCSL setting changes
When operation switches between CLV mode and CAV mode
For resynchronization, set the $A5 command XWOC to "1", wait for one LRCK cycle or more, and then set
XWOC to "0".
Digital High and Bass Boost
High and bass boost without external parts is possible using the built-in digital filter.
Perform the following operations when turning boost off or when lowering the current boost level.
1. Set $A5X command BSTCL to "1".
2. Wait 20ms or more, set the boost level or turn boost off, then set $A5X command BSTCL to "0".
High-cut Filter
This filter lowers the high-frequency level by approximately 8dB.
The frequency response is shown in Fig. 4-14.
0.00
2.00
4.00
6.00
8.00
10
100
1k
10k
Frequency [Hz]
Gain [dB]
Fig. 4-14. High-Cut Filter Frequency Response
137
CXD3048R
Compressor, Dynamic High and Bass Boost
1. Frequency Response and I/O Characteristics
Fig. 4-15 shows the frequency response for dynamic high boost and bass boost.
This figure shows the frequency response for a high boost turnover frequency of 5kHz and a bass boost
turnover frequency of 160Hz. The boost level and turnover frequency can be set independently for high
boost and bass boost. In addition, all frequencies are lowered by approximately 2dB in order to prevent
clipping, so the medium frequencies are 2dB output. The high boost and bass boost levels indicate the
relative values from this level.
Next, the compressor, high boost and bass boost I/O characteristics are shown in Fig. 4-17.
As shown in this figure, the compressor characteristics span all frequencies. In addition, the high boost and
bass boost characteristics are for when the input signal is sufficiently higher or lower than the turnover
frequency.
The boost levels can be set independently. Uth and Lth on the vertical axis are the gain control threshold
values, and the desired output value can be taken from the area enclosed by the parallelograms near these
levels. The Uth and Lth settings are described hereafter.
20.00
18.00
16.00
14.00
12.00
10.00
8.00
6.00
4.00
2.00
0.00
2.00
10
100
1k
10k
Frequency response [Hz]
Gain [dB]
(4)
(3)
(2)
(1)
(1) HBSL1 = 0, HBSL0 = 0, BBSL1 = 0, BBSL0 = 0
(2) HBSL1 = 0, HBSL0 = 1, BBSL1 = 0, BBSL0 = 1
(3) HBSL1 = 1, HBSL0 = 0, BBSL1 = 1, BBSL0 = 0
(4) HBSL1 = 1, HBSL0 = 1, BBSL1 = 1, BBSL0 = 1
Fig. 4-15. Digital Bass Boost Frequency Response
138
CXD3048R
2. Settings
When performing dynamic processing, the auditory volume and other characteristics change according to
the boost levels and various other settings. The values that can be set by the serial commands and the
resulting effects are described below.
2-1. Boost Level
The boost level can be set independently for the compressor, high boost and bass boost. Boost level here
refers to the maximum boost level when a low level signal is input. The boost level changes over time when
a high level signal is input in order to prevent clipping.
2-2. Gain Control Thresholds
The gain control thresholds are Uth and Lth. When the level exceeds Uth, the gain is reduced; when the
level falls below Lth, the gain is increased. If both Uth and Lth are set to large values, the volume increases
and the respective boost effects are emphasized. On the other hand, some sources may be clipped due to
the balance with the boost level. These values can be set independently for the compressor and high/bass
boost. The same values are shared for high and bass boost.
2-3. Attack Time, Release Time
The attack time represents the speed at which the gain is reduced after high level input, and the release
time represents the speed at which the gain is increased when the input level suddenly becomes smaller. If
these values are set to "fast", the boost effects increase. Like the gain control thresholds, these values can
be set independently for the compressor and high/bass boost.
2-4. Envelope Detection Release Time
This sets the output signal envelope coefficient used for gain control. When set to "fast", the boost effects
increase. This setting is shared by compressor and high/bass boost.
Table 4-16. Recommended Dynamic Bass and High Boost Settings



High boost
+10dB
+14dB
+18dB
+22dB
Bass boost
Standard
Slow
Slow
Slow
Attack time
Standard
Standard
Standard
Standard
Release time
12dB
12dB
12dB
12dB
Lch
1.9dB
1.9dB
1.9dB
1.9dB
Uch
139
CXD3048R
Input [dB]
0
Lth
Uth
Output [dB]
Fig. 4-17. Dynamic Processing I/O Characteristics
6
4/6/8/10
10/14/18/22
Boost level [dB]
23
12/4.4
12/4.4
Lth [dB]
8.0
1.9/0.9
1.9/0.9
Uth [dB]
Compressor
High boost
Bass boost
140
CXD3048R
4-12. LPF Block
The CXD3048R contains a secondary active LPF.
The LPF block application circuit is shown in Fig. 4-18.
1F
100
2200pF
AOUT1 (2)
VREFL (R)
Analog out
Fig. 4-18. LPF External Circuit
141
CXD3048R
4-13. Description of Shock-proof Memory Controller Block Functions
4-13-1. DRAM I/F
A 4M DRAM or 16M DRAM can be selected as the external buffer RAM. The 16M DRAM supports either row
address 2
12
and column address 2
10
or row address 2
11
and column address 2
11
.
Refresh is performed by data access, and the refresh cycle is approximately 11.6ms when 4M DRAM is
selected, or approximately 46.4ms (2
10
2
12
) or 23.2ms (2
11
2
11
) when 16M DRAM is selected.
In addition, XRAS-only-refresh is executed 14 times in order to initialize the RAM after the power is turned on
and the DRAM, which is to be used by the $A4X commands RSL1 and RSL0, is selected. Data access to the
DRAM is not possible during this period.
XRST
XRAS
Approximately 5.67s
14 times
4-13-2. Switching from Data Through Mode to Shock-proof
The CXD3048R performs refresh by data access.
When switching from (1) Shock-proof mode to (2) data through mode to (3) Shock-proof mode, be sure to
reset all of WA, VWA and RA before performing data access for (3).
142
CXD3048R
4-13-3. CPU Serial Data Output (when $A7X STASEL = 1)
Data is read out by setting the XSOEO command low and inputting SQCK. The data contents at the falling
edge of the XSOEO command are output from the SQSO pin at the falling edge of SCK.
XSOEO
SQCK
SQSO
D1
D0
D2
D3
D4
D5
D6
D7
D8
D9
D10
D11
Invalid
D0: XWPHD
Data write to DRAM prohibited signal (low for XFUL + ROF + WRNG)
D1: QRCVD
Indicates whether XQOK was registered as a defined address after it was sent.
(High = registration OK)
D2: XEMP
Low when the DRAM is empty of valid data. (VWA = RA)
D3: AM15
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.
D4: AM16
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.
D5: AM17
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.
D6: AM18
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.
D7: AM19
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.
D8: AM20
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.
D9: AM21
Address monitor; indicates the amount of valid data remaining.
D10: XFUL
Low when the DRAM is full and there is no write area.
D11: ROF
High when the DSP RAM has overflowed.
Note) When GRSCOR is low, QRCVD is high when data write to the DRAM is enabled, even if a negative
pulse is input to XQOK.
143
CXD3048R
4-13-4. Data Linking
In order to restart write after PCM data write to the DRAM has been interrupted due to sound skipping or other
factors, continuity must be maintained between the data written last and the subsequent data to be written.
Conventional systems fix an aim at the data linking point, compare the preceding DRAM reference data with
the data read from the disc, and then link the data when matching data is detected. However, when using
music software where a fixed pattern is repeated, this system may link the data at an incorrect point. In
addition, if pre-value hold or interpolation is performed at the point to be linked, data linking may not be
possible at all. In order to eliminate these data linking errors, the CXD3048R generates a crystal accuracy
SCOR (= GRSCOR) synchronized to the PCM data to allow data linking along the time axis, thus greatly
increasing the data linking accuracy.
4-13-5. Data Processing
The CXD3048R accumulates PCM data from the CD-DSP block in an external buffer and then inputs the data
to the DAC block in sync with the internally generated Fs system clock. At this time, the PCM data is loaded
and read out at the same rate during normal playback, so data does not accumulate in the buffer RAM.
Therefore, the loading rate must be increased. This is accomplished by setting the CD-DSP block to double-
speed mode and doubling the loading rate until the RAM is full. When the RAM becomes full, data regeneration
from the disc stops temporarily and the RAM data is read out to create an empty area, at which point loading
is restarted. These operations are then repeated to effectively use the entire area inside the RAM.
PCM Data Flow (Example for 4M


1 mode)
4-13-6. System Outline (when SLXQOK = 1 and SLXWRE = 1)
The addresses for accessing the buffer RAM data consist of a readout address (RA) and a write address (WA).
The data to be written is not always correct, and the subcodes, etc. must be constantly checked to make sure
the data is correct and there is no sound skipping. The CXD3048R checks subcode-Q using the CPU, and
defines the data by inputting a negative pulse to the XQOK pin. This defined address (VWA) is loaded to the
internal register and the data between VWA and RA is treated as valid data. WA advances at a speed twice
that of RA, and RA is written by WA and read out sequentially in the order registered by VWA. When RA
catches up to VWA, there is no more valid data and readout is prohibited (XEMP = low). In addition, when WA
catches up to RA, the buffer is full and write is prohibited (XWIH = low). In this manner, write to the RAM is
interrupted when the RAM becomes full and there is no write area or when sound skipping caused by
scratches, external disturbances or other factors is detected. Data
continuity must be ensured in order to restart write. Therefore, the
CXD3048R returns to the last defined address, and the CPU accesses
the defined address point it sent last (actually the data slightly before that
point) and reads the subcode-Q after the rising edge of SCOR. If the
subcode-Q matches the last defined address, XWRE is made to fall and
write is restarted when GRSCOR comes high within 7ms.
Note 1) If XWRE is made to fall when GRSCOR is low, XWIH goes
low and the write prohibited state results.
Note 2) When GRSCOR is low, VWA is not updated even if a
negative pulse is input to XQOK. Therefore, set XQOK high
while GRSCOR is low.
WA
VWA
RA
Valid data
CD-DSP
Shock-proof
DAC
4M DRAM
144
CXD3048R
4-13-7. Data Write (when SLXQOK = 1 and SLXWRE = 1)
The PCM data input from the DSP is loaded according to the Fs system clock inputs (BCKI, WDCI and LRCI),
and is written sequentially to the external DRAM according to WA when the XWRE pin input goes low and
internal write is enabled (XWIH pin output = high).
The written data must be checked by some means or other. The CXD3048R assumes data checking with
subcode-Q. In this case, the CPU reads subcode-Q triggered by the SCOR signal output from the DSP to
determine whether sound skipping occurred. If sound skipping is not detected, the CPU inputs a negative
pulse to the XQOK pin during the GRSCOR high interval which comes within 7ms, and the data written to WA
thus far is registered to VWA as data without sound skipping.
SCOR
SUBQ
GRSCOR
XQOK
No sound skipping = CRC OK
No sound skipping = CRC NG
WA
VWA
Write prohibition is determined by the internal status or by an external command. When prohibited by the
internal status, the XWIH pin goes low, and this status is established when any one of the following conditions
is met.
1. There is no empty area in the DRAM.
XFUL = low
2. The DSP RAM has overflowed.
ROF = high
3. XWRE was made to fall when GRSCOR is low.
WRNG = high
4. The DRAM write speed exceeds the set value.
SPOVER = high
(when $A7 command XWIH1 = 1)
5. Access to DRAM in the shock-proof memory controller block failed.
NOWR = high
(when $A7 command XWIH2 = 1)
6. The number of C2PO errors exceeds the set value.
monC2PO = high
($AE command WTC C2PO = 1)
7. Write is prohibited by the external input (A11 pin).
(when $A7 command A11 SEL = 1
and $AE command WTC C2PO = 1)
When the XWIH pin goes low due to the above conditions, the CPU must set the XWRE pin high and then the
XWIH pin high.
After the CPU sends XQOK, it must check whether XQOK was registered as a defined address. This is
because if the above conditions arise at the same time XQOK is sent, XQOK becomes invalid and the
addresses defined by the CPU and the CXD3048R may not match. Therefore, the XWIH pin output is used as
the XQOK recognition signal (QRCVD) while XQOK is low. When QRCVD is high, this indicates that XQOK
was correctly registered as a defined address (VWA was updated). When QRCVD is low, this indicates one of
the following conditions.
1. Write is prohibited due to the above conditions.
2. XWRE is high.
Regarding condition 2, if XQOK is sent while the XWRE pin is high, WA, VWA and RA are all reset (when
GRSCOR is high).
145
CXD3048R
4-13-8. Data Readout (when SLXQOK = 1 and SLXWRE = 1)
When data write starts, there is no valid data in the RAM so the XEMP pin is low. The XWRE pin goes from
high to low, and if there is no sound skipping or other problems with the CRC check at the next SCOR, XQOK
is sent during the GRSCOR high interval which comes within 7ms, and the defined address and valid data are
registered. At this point, the XEMP pin goes high for the first time and readout is enabled. Data readout follows
RA, and is performed in sync with the internally generated Fs system clocks. The readout data and the Fs
system clocks are output from the DATA and the BCK and LRCK pins, respectively.
RA is the address for reading out the written data that has been validated by VWA, and the area from VWA to
RA is the amount of valid data (|VWA RA|). The upper 5 bits are output as AM21 to AM17. When RA catches
up to VWA and there is no more valid data (|VWA RA| = 0), the XEMP pin goes low and readout is prohibited.
When this state occurs, the CPU must set the XRDE pin high to prohibit readout. To restart readout, valid data
must be registered as described above. The XEMP pin is held low until valid data is registered.
XWRE
XQOK
XEMP
XRDE
Note) After the XWRE pin goes from high to low, readout is enabled when valid data is registered by
the first XQOK. However, ensuring some difference between VWA and RA is recommended in
consideration of CRC NG, etc.
See also "Application Notes" for the control of the shock-proof memory controller block.
146
CXD3048R
4-14. CPU to DRAM Access Function
The CXD3048R can establish a special area in the DRAM. This allows a microcomputer to read and write
optional 16-bit data to a portion of the DRAM area.
This function can be used to store and optionally read out demodulated CD TEXT data, etc.
The range of this special area is set by $A7, and can be selected in 8 steps from 32K to 2M bits.
Table 4-19 shows the addresses which can be specified according to the used DRAM capacity and the special
area setting value.
In addition, the address specification method can be selected from absolute and relative specification.
0 0
1 1
RSL
1 0
4M setting
16M setting
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
0 0 0
0 0 1
0 1 0
0 1 1
1 0 0
1 0 1
1 1 0
1 1 1
MSL
2 1 0
-- -- -- -- -- -- --
00000 to 007FF
00000 to 00FFF
00000 to 01FFF
00000 to 03FFF
00000 to 07FFF
00000 to 0FFFF
00000 to 1FFFF
-- -- -- -- -- -- --
00000 to 007FF
00000 to 00FFF
00000 to 01FFF
00000 to 03FFF
00000 to 07FFF
00000 to 0FFFF
00000 to 1FFFF
DRDR19 to DRDR0
specification range
Table 4-19.
147
CXD3048R
Write and Read by Absolute Address Specification
WRITE
END
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "1"
L (Req NG)
Transfer an optical address
with the $A9F command
Check SQSO
H (Req OK)
Write optional data with the
$A9E command
(DRWR = 1, DRADR = 1)
(A)
READ
END
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "1"
L (Req NG)
Transfer an optional address
with the $A9F command
Check SQSO
H (Req OK)
Generate a readout request
with $A9E command
(DRWR = 0, DRADR = 1)
(B)
L (NG)
H (Data Ready)
Read 16-bit data from SQSO
and SQCK
Change $A8 command
XSOEO2 from "1" to "0"
Check SQSO
(1)
(2)
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "0"
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "0"
148
CXD3048R
Write Communication Timing
Readout Communication Timing
$A8
$A9F
$A9E
$A8
Command
XSOEO2
STDO OUT
SQSO
$A8
$A9F
$A9E
$A8
Command
XSOEO2
STDO OUT
SQSO
$A8
(2)
(1)
D0
D15
SQCK
Readout Communication Operation
(1) Set STDO OUT to "1" to switch the serial communication line for special memory.
(2) Send the address command ($A9F), then check whether the DRAM related processing has completed
using the SQSO pin.
(3) The data read out from the DRAM is loaded to the communication block inside the LSI by sending the read
command ($A9E) and causing XSOEO2 to fall ($A8). However, the DRAM related processing requires a
check as to whether the data was loaded properly using the SQSO pin.
(4) The readout data is output from the SQSO pin by inputting 16 clocks from the SQCK pin.
149
CXD3048R
Write and Read by Relative Address Specification
WRITE
END
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "1"
L (Req NG)
Check SQSO
H (Req OK)
Write the absolute address
(A) on page 147
Write optional data with the
$A9E command
(DRWR = 1, DRADR = 0)
PENDING
END
NEXT
N
Y
READ
END
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "1"
L (Req NG)
Check SQSO
H (Req OK)
Write the absolute address
(B) on page 147
Generate a readout request
with $A9E command
(DRWR = 0, DRADR = 0)
PENDING
END
NEXT
N
Y
L (NG)
Check SQSO
H (Data Ready)
Read 16-bit data from SQSO
and SQCK
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "0"
Change $A8 command
XSOEO2 from "1" to "0"
and set SDTO OUT to "1"
Set $A8 commands
XSOEO2 to "1" and
SDTO OUT to "0"
150
CXD3048R
4-15. Asymmetry Correction
Fig. 4-20 shows the block diagram and circuit example.
RFAC
R1
R1
ASYO
ASYI
+
+
R1 2
R2 5
=
BIAS
R1
R1
R2
ASYE command
Fig. 4-20. Asymmetry Correction Application Circuit
151
CXD3048R
4-16. CD TEXT Data Demodulation
In order to demodulate the CD TEXT data, set the command $8 Data 6 D3 TXON to "1". While TXON is "1",
the CD TEXT demodulation circuit occupies the EXCK and SBSO pins, so connect EXCK to low and do not
use the data output from SBSO. Also, 26.7ms (max.) are required to demodulate the CD TEXT data correctly
after TXON is set to "1".
The CD TEXT data is output by switching the SQSO pin with the command. The CD TEXT data output is
enabled by setting the command $8 Data 6 D2 TXOUT to "1". To read data, the readout clock should be input
to SQCK.
The readable data are the CRC counting results for each pack and the CD TEXT data (16 bytes) except for
CRC data.
When the CD TEXT data is read, the order of the MSB and LSB is inverted within each byte. As a result,
although the sequence of the bytes is the same, the bits within the bytes are now ordered LSB first.
Data which can be stored in the LSI is 1 packet (4 packs).
SQCK
SQSO
TXOUT
Subcode
Decoder
CD TEXT
Decoder
TXON
SBSO
EXCK
Fig. 4-21. Block Diagram of CD TEXT Demodulation Circuit
152
CXD3048R
CRC
4
CRC
3
CRC
2
CRC
1
0
0
0
0
S2
R2 W1
V1
U1
T1
S1
R1
U3
T3
S3
R3 W2
V2
U2
T2
W4 V4
U4
T4
S4
CRC Data
ID1 (Pack1)
ID2 (Pack1)
ID3 (Pack1)
16 Bytes
16 Bytes
16 Bytes
16 Bytes
4 bits
4 bits
Subcode Q Data
SCOR
TXOUT
(command)
SQCK
SQSO
SQCK
TXOUT
(command)
LSB
MSB
LSB
MSB LSB
CRC
0
Pack1
Pack2
Pack3
Pack4
CRCF
CRCF
80 Clocks
SQSO
520 Clocks
Fig. 4-22. CD TEXT Data Timing Chart
153
CXD3048R
[5] Description of Servo Signal Processing System Functions and Commands
5-1. General Description of Servo Signal Processing System (V
DD
: Supply voltage)
Focus servo
Sampling rate:
88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs)
Input range:
1/4V
DD
to 3/4V
DD
Output format:
7-bit PWM
Other:
Offset cancel
Focus bias adjustment
Focus search
Gain-down
Defect countermeasure
Auto gain control
Tracking servo
Sampling rate:
88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs)
Input range:
1/4V
DD
to 3/4V
DD
Output format:
7-bit PWM
Other:
Offset cancel
E:F balance adjustment
Track jump
Gain-up
Defect countermeasure
Drive cancel
Auto gain control
Vibration countermeasure
Sled servo
Sampling rate:
345Hz (when MCK = 128Fs)
Input range:
1/4V
DD
to 3/4V
DD
Output format:
7-bit PWM
Other:
Sled move
FOK, MIRR, DFCT signal generation
RF signal sampling rate: 1.4MHz (when MCK = 128Fs)
Input range:
1/4V
DD
to 3/4V
DD
Other:
RF zero level automatic measurement
154
CXD3048R
5-2. Digital Servo Block Master Clock (MCK)
The clock with 2/3 frequency of the crystal is supplied to the digital servo block.
XT4D and XT2D are $3F commands, and XT1D is a $3E command. (Default is "0" for each command)
The digital servo block is designed with an MCK frequency of 5.6448MHz (128Fs) as typical.
Table 5-1.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
Mode
384Fs
384Fs
384Fs
768Fs
768Fs
768Fs
768Fs
XTAI
256Fs
256Fs
256Fs
512Fs
512Fs
512Fs
512Fs
FSTO
--
--
0
--
--
--
1
XTSL
--
--
0
--
--
1
0
XT4D
--
1
0
--
1
0
0
XT2D
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
XT1D
1
1/2
1/2
1
1/2
1/4
1/4
Frequency division ratio
256Fs
128Fs
128Fs
512Fs
256Fs
128Fs
128Fs
MCK
Fs = 44.1kHz, --: don't care
155
CXD3048R
5-3. DC Offset Cancel [AVRG (Average) Measurement and Compensation] (See Fig. 5-3.)
The CXD3048R can measure the averages of RFDC, VC, FE and TE and compensate these signals using the
measurement results to control the servo effectively. This AVRG measurement and compensation is necessary
to initialize the CXD3048R, and is able to cancel the DC offset.
AVRG measurement takes the levels applied to the VC, FE, RFDC and TE pins as the digital average values of
256 samples, and then loads these values into each AVRG register.
The AVRG measurement commands are D15 (VCLM), D13 (FLM), D11 (RFLM) and D4 (TCLM) of $38.
Measurement is on when the respective command is set to "1".
AVRG measurement requires approximately 2.9ms to 5.8ms (when MCK = 128Fs) after the command is
received.
The completion of AVRG measurement operation can be monitored by the SENS pin. (See Timing Chart 5-2.)
Monitoring requires that the upper 8 bits of the command register are 38 (h).
XLAT
SENS
(= XAVEBSY)
Max. 1s
AVRG measurement completed
2.9 to 5.8ms
<Measurement>
VC AVRG: The VC DC offset (VC AVRG) which is the center voltage for the system is measured and used to
compensate the FE, TE and SE signals.
FE AVRG: The FE DC offset (FE AVRG) is measured and used to compensate the FE and FZC signals.
TE AVRG: The TE DC offset (TE AVRG) is measured and used to compensate the TE and SE signals.
RF AVRG: The RF DC offset (RF AVRG) is measured and used to compensate the RFDC signal.
<Compensation>
RFLC:
(RF signal RF AVRG) is input to the RF In register.
"00" is input when the RF signal is lower than RF AVRG.
TCL0:
(TE signal VC AVRG) is input to the TRK In register.
TCL1:
(TE signal TE AVRG) is input to the TRK In register.
VCLC:
(FE signal VC AVRG) is input to the FCS In register.
FLC1:
(FE signal FE AVRG) is input to the FCS In register.
FLC0:
(FE signal FE AVRG) is input to the FZC register.
Two methods of canceling the DC offset are assumed for the CXD3048R. These methods are shown in Figs. 5-
3a and 5-3b.
An example of AVRG measurement and compensation commands is shown below.
$38 08 00 (RF AVRG measurement)
$38 20 00 (FE AVRG measurement)
$38 00 10 (TE AVRG measurement)
$38 14 0A (Compensation on [RFLC, FLC0, FLC1, TLC1]; corresponds to Fig. 5-3a.)
See the description of $38 for these commands.
Timing Chart 5-2.
156
CXD3048R
5-4. E:F Balance Adjustment Function (See Fig. 5-3.)
When the disc is rotated with the laser on, and with the FCS (focus) servo on via FCS search, the traverse
waveform appears in the TE signal due to disc eccentricity.
In this condition, the low-frequency component can be extracted from the TE signal using the built-in TRK hold
filter by setting D5 (TBLM) of $38 to "1".
The extracted low-frequency component is loaded into the TRVSC register as a digital value, and the TRVSC
register value is established when TBLM returns to "0".
Next, setting D2 (TLC2) of $38 to "1" compensates the values obtained from the TE and SE input pins with the
TRVSC register value (subtraction), allowing the E:F balance offset to be adjusted. (See Fig. 5-3.)
5-5. FCS Bias (Focus Bias) Adjustment Function
The FBIAS register value can be added to the FCS servo filter input by setting D14 (FBON) of $3A to "1". (See
Fig. 5-3.)
When D11 = 0 and D10 = 1 is set by $34F, the FBIAS register value can be written using the 9-bit value of D9
to D1 (D9: MSB).
In addition, the RF jitter can be monitored by setting the $8 command SOCT to "1". (See "DSP Block Timing
Chart".)
The FBIAS register can be used as a counter by setting D13 (FBSS) of $3A to "1". The FBIAS register functions
as an up counter when D12 (FBUP) of $3A = 1, and as a down counter when D12 (FBUP) of $3A = 0.
The number of up and down steps can be changed by setting D11 and D10 (FBV1 and FBV0) of $3A.
When using the FBIAS register as a counter, the counter stops when the value set beforehand in FBL9 to
FBL1 of $34 matches the FCSBIAS value. Also, if the upper 8 bits of the command register are $3A at this
time, SENS goes high and the counter stop can be monitored.
Here, assume the FBIAS setting value FB9
to FB1 and the FBIAS LIMIT value FBL9 to
FBL1 are set in status A. For example, if
command registers FBUP = 0, FBV1 = 0,
FBV0 = 0 and FBSS = 1 are set from this
status, down count starts from status A and
approaches the set LIMIT value. When the
LIMIT value is reached and the FBIAS value
matches FBL9 to FBL1, the counter stops
and the SENS pin goes high. Note that the
up/down counter counts at each sampling
cycle of the focus servo filter. The number of
steps by which the count value changes can
be selected from 1, 2, 4 or 8 steps by FBV1
and FBV0. When converted to FE input, 1
step corresponds to 1/512
V
DD
/2.
A
B
C
FBIAS setting value (FB9 to FB1)
LIMIT value (FBL9 to FBL1)
SENS value
A: Register mode
B: Counter mode
C: Counter mode (when stopped)
157
CXD3048R
TE AVRG
register
TLC1
TRVSC
register
TLC2
to TRK In register
TE from A/D
FE AVRG
register
FLC1
FBIAS
register
FBON
to FCS In register
FLC0
to FZC register
FE from A/D
RFLC
to RF In register
RFDC from A/D
RF AVRG
register
to SLD In register
SE from A/D
TLC1 TLD1
TLC2 TLD2
+
VC AVRG
register
TLC0
TRVSC
register
TLC2
to TRK In register
TE from A/D
FBIAS
register
FBON
to FCS In register
VCLC
to FZC register
FE from A/D
RFLC
to RF In register
RFDC from A/D
RF AVRG
register
to SLD In register
SE from A/D
TLC0 TLD0
TLC2 TLD2
+
FE AVRG
register
FLC0
Fig. 5-3a.
Fig. 5-3b.
158
CXD3048R
5-6. AGCNTL (Automatic Gain Control) Function
The AGCNTL function automatically adjusts the filter internal gain in order to obtain the appropriate servo loop
gain. AGCNTL not only copes with the sensitivity variation of the actuator and photo diode, etc., but also
obtains the optimal gain for each disc.
The AGCNTL command is sent when each servo is turned on. During AGCNTL operation, if the upper 8 bits of
the command register are 38 (h), the completion of AGCNTL operation can be confirmed by monitoring the
SENS pin. (See Timing Chart 5-4 and "Description of SENS Signals".)
Setting D9 and D8 of $38 to "1" sets FCS (focus) and TRK (tracking) respectively to AGCNTL operation.
Note) During AGCNTL operation, each servo filter gain must be normal, and the anti-shock circuit (described
hereafter) must be disabled.
XLAT
SENS
(= AGOK)
Max. 11.4s
AGCNTL completion
Timing Chart 5-4.
Coefficient K13 changes for AGF (focus AGCNTL) and coefficients K23 and K07 change for AGT (tracking
AGCNTL) due to AGCNTL.
These coefficients change from 01 to 7F (h), and they must also be set within this range when written
externally.
After AGCNTL operation has completed, these coefficient values can be confirmed by reading them out from
the SENS pin with the serial readout function (described hereafter).
AGCNTL related settings
The following settings can be changed with $35, $36 and $37.
FG6 to FG0; AGF convergence gain setting, effective setting range: 00 to 57 (h)
TG6 to TG0; AGT convergence gain setting, effective setting range: 00 to 57 (h)
AGS;
Self-stop on/off
AGJ;
Convergence completion judgment time
AGGF;
Internally generated sine wave amplitude (AGF)
AGGT;
Internally generated sine wave amplitude (AGT)
AGV1;
AGCNTL sensitivity 1 (during rough adjustment)
AGV2;
AGCNTL sensitivity 2 (during fine adjustment)
AGHS;
Rough adjustment on/off
AGHT;
Fine adjustment time
Note) Converging servo loop gain values can be changed with the FG6 to FG0 and TG6 to TG0 setting
values. In addition, these setting values must be within the effective setting range. The default settings
aim for 0dB at 1kHz. However, since convergence values vary according to the characteristics of each
constituent element of the servo loop, FG and TG values should be set as necessary.
159
CXD3048R
AGCNTL default operation has two stages.
In the first stage, rough adjustment is performed with high sensitivity for a certain period of time (select
256/128ms with AGHT, when MCK = 128Fs), and the AGCNTL coefficient approaches the appropriate value.
The sensitivity at this time can be selected from two types with AGV1.
In the second stage, the AGCNTL coefficient is finely adjusted with relatively low sensitivity to further approach
the appropriate value. The sensitivity for the second stage can be selected from two types with AGV2. In the
second stage of default operation, when the AGCNTL coefficient reaches the appropriate value and stops
changing, the CXD3048R confirms that the AGCNTL coefficient has not changed for a certain period of time
(select 63/31ms with AGHJ, when MCK = 128Fs), and then completes AGCNTL operation. (Self-stop mode)
This self-stop mode can be canceled by setting AGS to "0".
In addition, the first stage is omitted for AGCNTL operation when AGHS is set to "0".
An example of AGCNTL coefficient transitions during AGCNTL operation with various settings is shown in
Fig. 5-5.
Initial value
SENS
AGCNTL
Start
AGCNTL
completion
Convergence value
AGCNTL coefficient value
Slope AGV1
AGHT
AGJ
Slope AGV2
Fig. 5-5.
Note) Fig. 5-5 shows the case where the AGCCNTL coefficient converges from the initial value to a smaller
value.
160
CXD3048R
5-7. FCS Servo and FCS Search (Focus Search)
The FCS servo is controlled by the 8-bit serial command $0X. (See Table 5-6.)
Table 5-6.
0
Register
name
FOCUS
CONTROL
Command
0 0 0 0
D23 to D20
1 0 -- --
1 1 -- --
0 -- 0 --
0 -- 0 --
0 -- 0 0
0 -- 0 0
D19 to D16
FOCUS SERVO ON (FOCUS GAIN NORMAL)
FOCUS SERVO ON (FOCUS GAIN DOWN)
FOCUS SERVO OFF, 0V OUT
FOCUS SERVO OFF, FOCUS SEARCH VOLTAGE OUT
FOCUS SEARCH VOLTAGE DOWN
FOCUS SEARCH VOLTAGE UP
--: don't care
FCS Search
FCS search is required in the course of turning on the FCS servo.
Fig. 5-7 shows the signals for sending commands $00
$02
$03 and performing only FCS search operation.
Fig. 5-8 shows the signals for sending $08 (FCS on) after that.
FCSDRV
RF
FOK
FE
FZC
FZC comparator level
$00 $02
$03
0
0
Fig. 5-7.
FCSDRV
RF
FOK
FE
FZC
$00 $02
$03
0
$08
Fig. 5-8.
161
CXD3048R
5-8. TRK (Tracking) and SLD (Sled) Servo Control
The TRK and SLD servos are controlled by the 8-bit command $2X. (See Table 5-9.)
When the upper 4 bits of the serial data are 2 (h), TZC is output to the SENS pin.
Table 5-9.
--: don't care
TRK Servo
The TRK JUMP (track jump) level can be set with 6 bits (D13 to D8) of $36.
In addition, when the TRK servo is on and D17 of $1 is set to "1", the TRK servo filter switches to gain-up
mode. The filter also switches to gain-up mode when the LOCK signal goes low or when vibration is detected
with the anti-shock circuit (described hereafter) enabled.
The CXD3048R has 2 types of gain-up filter structures in TRK gain-up mode which can be selected by setting
D16 of $1. (See Table 5-17.)
SLD Servo
The SLD MOV (sled move) output, composed of a basic value from 6 bits (D13 to D8) of $37, is determined by
multiplying this value by 1
, 2
, 3
, or 4
set using D17 and D16 when D18 = D19 = 0 is set with $3. (See
Table 5-10.)
SLD MOV must be performed continuously for 50s or more. In addition, if the LOCK input signal goes low
when the SLD servo is on, the SLD servo turns off.
Note) When the LOCK signal is low, the TRK servo switches to gain-up mode and the SLD servo is turned
off. These operations are disabled by setting D6 (LKSW) of $38 to "1".
Table 5-10.
2
Register
name
TRACKING
MODE
Command
0 0 1 0
D23 to D20
0 0 -- --
0 1 -- --
1 0 -- --
1 1 -- --
-- -- 0 0
-- -- 0 1
-- -- 1 0
-- -- 1 1
D19 to D16
TRACKING SERVO OFF
TRACKING SERVO ON
FORWARD TRACK JUMP
REVERSE TRACK JUMP
SLED SERVO OFF
SLED SERVO ON
FORWARD SLED MOVE
REVERSE SLED MOVE
3
Register
name
SELECT
Command
0 0 1 1
D23 to D20
0 0 0 0
0 0 0 1
0 0 1 0
0 0 1 1
D19 to D16
SLED KICK LEVEL (basic value
1)
SLED KICK LEVEL (basic value
2)
SLED KICK LEVEL (basic value
3)
SLED KICK LEVEL (basic value
4)
162
CXD3048R
5-9. MIRR and DFCT Signal Generation
The RF signal obtained from the RFDC pin is sampled at approximately 1.4MHz (when MCK = 128Fs) and
loaded. The MIRR and DFCT signals are generated from this RF signal.
MIRR Signal Generation
The loaded RF signal is applied to peak hold and bottom hold circuits.
An envelope is generated from the waveforms generated in these circuits, and the MIRR comparator level is
generated from the average of this envelope waveform.
The MIRR signal is generated by comparing the waveform generated by subtracting the bottom hold value
from the peak hold value with this MIRR comparator level. (See Fig. 5-11.)
The bottom hold speed and mirror sensitivity can be selected from four values using D7 and D6, and D5 and
D4, respectively, of $3C.
Fig. 5-11.
DFCT Signal Generation
The loaded RF signal is input to two peak hold circuits with different time constants, and the DFCT signal is
generated by comparing the difference between these two peak hold waveforms with the DFCT comparator
level. (See Fig. 5-12.)
The DFCT comparator level can be selected from four values using D13 and D12 of $3B.
RF
Peak Hold
Bottom Hold
Peak Hold
Bottom Hold
MIRR
MIRR Comp
(Mirror comparator level)
H
L
RF
Peak Hold1
Peak Hold2
Peak Hold2
Peak Hold1
DFCT
(Defect comparator level)
H
L
SDF
Fig. 5-12.
163
CXD3048R
5-10. DFCT Countermeasure Circuit
The DFCT countermeasure circuit maintains the directionality of the servo so that the servo does not become
easily dislocated due to scratches or defects on discs.
Specifically, this operation is achieved by detecting scratches and defects with the DFCT signal generation
circuit, and when DFCT goes high, applying the low-frequency component of the error signal before DFCT
went high to the FCS and TRK servo filter inputs. (See Fig. 5-13.)
In addition, these operations are activated by the default. They can be disabled by setting D7 (DFSW) of $38 to "1".
Input register
Hold register EN
Hold filter
Servo filter
Error signal
DFCT
Fig. 5-13.
5-11. Anti-shock Circuit
When vibrations occur in the CD player, this circuit forces the TRK filter to switch to gain-up mode so that the
servo does not become easily dislocated. This circuit is for systems which require vibration countermeasures.
Concretely, vibrations are detected using an internal anti-shock filter and comparator circuit, and the gain is
increased. (See Fig. 5-14.)
The comparator level is fixed to 1/16 of the maximum comparator input amplitude. However, the comparator
level is practically variable by adjusting the value of the anti-shock filter output coefficient K35.
This function can be turned on and off by D19 of $1 when the brake circuit (described hereafter) is off. (See
Table 5-17.)
This circuit can also support an external vibration detection circuit, and can set the TRK servo filter to gain-up
mode by inputting high level to the ATSK pin.
When the upper 4 bits of the command register are 1 (h), vibration detection can be monitored from the SENS
pin. It can also be monitored from the ATSK pin by setting $3F command ASOT to "1".
TE
Anti-shock
filter
TRK gain-up
filter
TRK gain normal
filter
TRK
PWM Gen.
ATSK
SENS
Comparator
Fig. 5-14.
164
CXD3048R
5-12. Brake Circuit
Immediately after a long distance track jump it tends to be hard for the actuator to settle and for the servo to
turn on.
The brake circuit prevents these phenomenon.
In principle, the brake circuit uses the tracking drive as a brake by cutting the unnecessary portions utilizing
the 180 offset in the RF envelope and tracking error phase relationship which occurs when the actuator
traverses the track in the radial direction from the inner track to the outer track and vice versa. (See Figs. 5-15
and 5-16.)
Concretely, this operation is achieved by masking the tracking drive using the TRKCNCL signal generated by
loading the MIRR signal at the edge of the TZC (Tracking Zero Cross) signal.
The brake circuit can be turned on and off by D18 of $1. (See Table 5-17.)
In addition, the low frequency for the tracking drive after masking can be boosted. (SFBK1 and SFBK2 of
$34B)
TRK
DRV
FWD
JMP
REV
JMP Servo ON
RF
Trace
MIRR
TE
0
TZC
Edge
TRKCNCL
0
TRK DRV
(SFBK OFF)
SENS
TZC out
Inner track
Outer track
0
TRK DRV
(SFBK ON)
TRK
DRV
REV
JMP
FWD
JMP Servo ON
RF
Trace
MIRR
TE
0
TZC
Edge
TRKCNCL
0
TRK DRV
(SFBK OFF)
SENS
TZC out
Outer track
Inner track
0
TRK DRV
(SFBK ON)
Fig. 5-15.
Fig. 5-16.
Fig. 5-17.
--: don't care
1
Register
name
TRACKING
CONTROL
Command
0 0 0 1
D23 to D20
1 0 -- --
0 -- -- --
-- 1 -- --
-- 0 -- --
-- -- 0 --
-- -- 1 --
-- -- -- 1
-- -- -- 0
D19 to D16
ANTI SHOCK ON
ANTI SHOCK OFF
BRAKE ON
BRAKE OFF
TRACKING GAIN NORMAL
TRACKING GAIN UP
TRACKING GAIN UP FILTER SELECT 1
TRACKING GAIN UP FILTER SELECT 2
165
CXD3048R
5-13. COUT Signal
The COUT signal is output to count the number of tracks during traverse, etc. It is basically generated by
loading the MIRR signal at both edges of the TZC signal. The used TZC signal can be selected from among
three different phases according to the COUT signal application.
HPTZC: For 1-track jumps
Fast phase COUT signal generation with a fast phase TZC signal. (The TZC phase is advanced by
a cut-off 1kHz digital HPF; when MCK = 128Fs.)
STZC:
For COUT generation when MIRR is externally input and for applications other than COUT
generation.
This is generated by sampling the TE signal at 700kHz. (when MCK = 128Fs)
DTZC:
For high-speed traverse
Reliable COUT signal generation with a delayed phase STZC signal.
Since it takes some time to generate the MIRR signal, it is necessary to delay the TZC signal in accordance
with the MIRR signal delay during high-speed traverse.
The COUT signal output method is switched with D15 and D14 of $3C.
When D15 = 1:
STZC
When D15 = 0 and D14 = 0: HPTZC
When D15 = 0 and D14 = 1: DTZC
When DTZC is selected, the delay can be selected from two values with D14 of $36.
5-14. Serial Readout Circuit
The measurement and adjustment results specified beforehand by serial command $39 can be read out from
the SENS pin by inputting the readout clock to the SCLK pin. (See Fig. 5-18, Table 5-19 and "Description of
SENS Signals".)
Specified commands
See the table on page 180.
t
DLS
t
SPW
1/f
SCLK
MSB
LSB
XLAT
SCLK
Serial Readout Data
(SENS pin)
Fig. 5-18.
SCLK frequency
SCLK pulse width
Delay time
Item
f
SCLK
t
SPW
t
DLS
Symbol
31.3
15
Min.
Typ.
Max.
MHz
ns
s
Unit
16
Table 5-19.
During readout, the upper 8 bits of the command register must be 39 (h).
166
CXD3048R
5-15. Writing to Coefficient RAM
The coefficient RAM can be rewritten by $34. All coefficients have default values in the built-in ROM, and
transfer from the ROM to the RAM is completed approximately 40s (when MCK = 128Fs) after the XRST pin
rises. (The coefficient RAM cannot be rewritten during this period.)
After that, the characteristics of each built-in filter can be finely adjusted by rewriting the data for each address
of the coefficient RAM.
The coefficient rewrite command is comprised of 24 bits, with D14 to D8 of $34 as the address (D15 = 0) and
D7 to D0 as the data. Coefficient rewriting is completed 11.3s (when MCK = 128Fs) after the command is
received. When rewriting multiple coefficients continuously, be sure to wait 11.3s (when MCK = 128Fs) before
sending the next rewrite command.
5-16. PWM Output
FCS, TRK and SLD PWM format outputs are described below.
In particular, FCS and TRK use a double oversampling noise shaper.
Timing Chart 5-20 and Fig. 5-21 show examples of output waveforms and drive circuits.
64t
MCK
64t
MCK
64t
MCK
At
MCK
At
MCK
SFDR
SRDR
SLD
32t
MCK
32t
MCK
32t
MCK
32t
MCK
32t
MCK
32t
MCK
FCS/TRK
FFDR/
TFDR
FRDR/
TRDR
Output value +A
Output value A
Output value 0
t
MCK
A
2
t
MCK
A
2
t
MCK
A
2
t
MCK
A
2
MCK
(5.6448MHz)
Timing Chart 5-20.
Fig. 5-21. Drive Circuit
R
R
R
R
V
EE
DRV
V
CC
RDR
FDR
t
MCK
=
180ns
1
5.6448MHz
167
CXD3048R
5-17. Servo Status Changes Produced by LOCK Signal
When the LOCK signal becomes low, the TRK servo switches to the gain-up mode and the SLD servo turns off
in order to prevent SLD free-running.
Setting D6 (LKSW) of $38 to "1" deactivates this function.
In other words, neither the TRK servo nor the SLD servo change even when the LOCK signal becomes low.
This enables microcomputer control.
5-18. Description of Commands and Data Sets
$34
0
KA6
KA5
KA4
KA3
KA2
KA1
KA0
KD7
KD6
KD5
KD4
KD3
KD2
KD1
KD0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
When D15 = 0.
KA6 to KA0: Coefficient address
KD7 to KD0: Coefficient data
1
0
0
0
PGFS1 PGFS0PFOK1 PFOK0
0
0
0
MRS MRT1 MRT0
0
0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$348 (preset: $348 000)
PGFS1
Processing
High when the frame sync is at the correct timing, low when not the correct timing.
High when the frame sync is at the correct timing, low when continuously not the
correct timing for 2ms or longer.
High when the frame sync is at the correct timing, low when continuously not the
correct timing for 4ms or longer.
High when the frame sync is at the correct timing, low when continuously not the
correct timing for 8ms or longer.
PGFS0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
These commands set the GFS signal hold time. The hold time is inversely proportional to the playback speed.
PFOK1
Processing
High when the RFDC value is higher than the FOK slice level, low when lower than
the FOK slice level.
High when the RFDC value is higher than the FOK slice level, low when continuously
lower than the FOK slice level for 4.35ms or more.
High when the RFDC value is higher than the FOK slice level, low when continuously
lower than the FOK slice level for 10.16ms or more.
High when the RFDC value is higher than the FOK slice level, low when continuously
lower than the FOK slice level for 21.77ms or more.
PFOK0
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
These commands set the FOK signal hold time. See $3B for the FOK slice level.
These are the values when MCK = 128Fs, and the hold time is inversely proportional to the MCK setting.
168
CXD3048R
MRS:
This command switches the time constant for generating the MIRR comparator level of the
MIRR generation circuit.
When "0", the time constant is normal. (default)
When "1", the time constant is longer than normal.
The time during which MIRR = high due to the effects of RFDC signal pulse noise, etc.,
can be suppressed by setting MRS = 1.
MRT1, MRT0:
These commands limit the time while MIRR = high.
MIRR maximum time [ms]
No time limit
1.10
2.20
4.00
: preset
MRT1
0
0
1
1
MRT0
0
1
0
1
$34A (preset: $34A 150)
Command bit
A/DSEL = 0
A/DSEL = 1
Processing
Bit 1 of the channel status data is output as audio data.
Bit 1 of the channel status data is output as other than audio data.
1
0
1
0
A/D
SEL
COPY
EN
EMPH
D
CAT
b8
DOUT
EN1
DOUT
DMUT
DOUT
WOD
WIN
EN
DOUT
EN2
0
0
0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
Command bit
COPY EN = 0
COPY EN = 1
Processing
Bit 2 of the channel status data is output as digital copy prohibited.
Bit 2 of the channel status data is output as digital copy enabled.
Command bit
EMPH D = 0
EMPH D = 1
Processing
Bit 3 of the channel status data is output as without pre-emphasis.
Bit 3 of the channel status data is output as with pre-emphasis.
Command bit
CAT b8 = 0
CAT b8 = 1
Processing
Bit 8 of the channel status data is output as "0".
Bit 8 of the channel status data is output as "1".
Command bit
DOUT EN1 = 0
DOUT EN1 = 1
Processing
The DOUT signal, generated from the PCM data read out from the disc, is output.
The DOUT signal, generated from the DA interface input, is output.
169
CXD3048R
Command bit
DOUT DMUT = 0
DOUT DMUT = 1
Processing
Digital Out output is normally output.
All the audio data portions are output in zero, with Digital Out output as it is.
Command bit
DOUT WOD = 0
DOUT WOD = 1
Processing
The DOUT sync window is not open.
The DOUT sync window is open.
Command bit
WIN EN = 0
WIN EN = 1
Processing
Automatic synchronization to the input LRCK to match the phase with the internal
processing is disabled.
Automatic synchronization to the input LRCK to match the phase with the internal
processing is disabled.
Command bit
DOUT EN2 = 0
DOUT EN2 = 1
Processing
Set to "0" when not generating Digital Out from the DA interface input.
Set to "1" when generating Digital Out from the DA interface input.
$34A commands cont.
DOUT output
OFF
0dB
The output from the PCM
data read out from a disc.
dB
The output from the PCM
data read out from a disc.
0dB
The output from the DA
interface input.
dB
The output from the DA
interface input.
See "Mute conditions" (1) and (3) to (5) of $AX commands for the other mute conditions.
See $8 commands for DOUT Mute and DOUT Mute F.
DOUT
Mute F
--
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
--
--
DOUT
Mute
--
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
--
--
Other mute
conditions
--
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
--
--
$B MD2
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
--
--
DOUT
DMUT
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
0
1
DOUT
EN1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
--: don't care
170
CXD3048R
1
0
1
1
SFBK1 SFBK2
0
0
LB1SN LB2SN LB2SM
0
0
0
0
0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$34B (preset: $34B 000)
The low frequency can be boosted for brake operation.
See 5-12 for brake operation.
SFBK1: When "1", brake operation is performed by setting the LowBooster-1 input to "0".
This is valid only when TLB1ON = 1. Preset is "0".
SFBK2: When "1", brake operation is performed by setting the LowBooster-2 input to "0".
This is valid only when TLB2ON = 1. Preset is "0".
See the $34C command booster setting for LB1SN, LB2SN and LB2SM.
$34C (preset: $34C 000)
1
1
0
0
THBON FHBON TLB1ON FLB1ON TLB2ON
0
HBST1 HBST0 LB1S1 LB1S0 LB2S1 LB2S0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
These bits turn on the boost function. (See 5-20. Filter Composition.)
There are five boosters (three for the TRK filter and two for the FCS filter) which can be turned on and off
independently.
THBON: When "1", the high frequency is boosted for the TRK filter. Preset is "0".
FHBON: When "1", the high frequency is boosted for the FCS filter. Preset is "0".
TLB1ON: When "1", the low frequency is boosted for the TRK filter. Preset is "0".
FLB1ON: When "1", the low frequency is boosted for the FCS filter. Preset is "0".
TLB2ON: When "1", the low frequency is boosted for the TRK filter. Preset is "0".
The difference between TLB1ON and TLB2ON is the position where the low frequency is boosted.
For TLB1ON, the low frequency is boosted before the TRK jump, and for TLB2ON, after the TRK jump.
The following commands set the boosters. (See 5-20. Filter Composition.)
HBST1, HBST0: TRK and FCS HighBooster setting.
HighBooster has the configuration shown in Fig. 5-22a, and can select three different
combinations of coefficients BK1, BK2 and BK3. (See Table 5-23a.)
An example of characteristics is shown in Fig. 5-24a.
These characteristics are the same for both the TRK and FCS filters.
The sampling frequency is 88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs).
LB1S1, LB1S0, LB1SN:
TRK and FCS LowBooster-1 setting.
LowBooster-1 has the configuration shown in Fig. 5-22b, and can select six different
combinations of coefficients BK4, BK5 and BK6. (See Table 5-23b.)
An example of characteristics is shown in Fig. 5-24b.
These characteristics are the same for both the TRK and FCS filters.
The sampling frequency is 88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs).
LB2S1, LB2S0, LB2SN, LB2SM:
TRK LowBooster-2 setting.
LowBooster-2 has the configuration shown in Fig. 5-22c, and can select six different
combinations of coefficients BK7, BK8 and BK9. (See Table 5-23c.)
An example of characteristics is shown in Fig. 5-24c.
This booster is used exclusively for the TRK filter.
The sampling frequency is 88.2kHz (when MCK = 128Fs).
Note) Fs = 44.1kHz
171
CXD3048R
BK2
Z
1
Z
1
BK1
BK3
HBST1
HBST0
HighBooster setting
BK1
120/128
124/128
126/128
BK2
96/128
112/128
120/128
BK3
2
2
2
--
0
1
0
1
1
Table. 5-23a.
Fig. 5-22a.
BK5
Z
Z
BK4
BK6
1
1
LB1S1
LowBooster-1 setting
BK4
255/256
511/512
1023/1024
127/128
255/256
511/512
BK5
1023/1024
2047/2048
4095/4096
255/256
511/512
1023/1024
BK6
1/4
1/4
1/4
1
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
Table. 5-23b.
Fig. 5-22b.
BK8
Z
Z
BK7
BK9
1
1
LowBooster-2 setting
Table. 5-23c.
Fig. 5-22c.
LB1S0
--
0
1
--
0
1
LB1SN
0
0
0
1
1
1
Characteristic
diagram
1
LB2S1
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
1
1
LB2S0
--
0
1
--
0
1
--
0
1
LB2SN
0
0
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
LB2SM
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
BK9
1/4
1/4
1/4
1
1
1
1
1
1
BK8
1023/1024
2047/2048
4095/4096
127/128
255/256
511/512
1023/1024
2047/2048
4095/4096
BK7
255/256
511/512
1023/1024
31/32
63/64
127/128
255/256
511/512
1023/1024
1
to correspond to to in Fig. 5-23b respectively.
2
to correspond to to in Fig. 5-23c respectively.
--: don't care
--: don't care
--: don't care
Characteristic
diagram
1
1
6
9
1
6
1
1
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
172
CXD3048R
15
9
3
3
9
15
Gain [dB]
12
6
0
6
12
100
10
1
Frequency [Hz]
1k
10k
2
3
1
90
+90
Phase [deg
ree]
72
36
0
+36
+72
100
10
1
Frequency [Hz]
1k
10k
2
3
1
Fig. 5-24a. Servo HighBooster characteristics [FCS, TRK] (MCK = 128Fs)
HBST1 = 0
HBST1 = 1, HBST0 = 0
HBST1 = 1, HBST0 = 1
1
2
3
173
CXD3048R
15
9
3
3
9
15
Gain [dB]
12
6
0
6
12
100
10
1
Frequency [Hz]
1k
10k
90
18
Phase [deg
ree]
72
54
36
18
0
100
10
1
Frequency [Hz]
1k
10k
2
1
3
2
3
1
4
5
6
4
5
6
Fig. 5-24b. Servo LowBooster-1 characteristics [FCS, TRK] (MCK = 128Fs)
( to correspond to to in Table 5-23b respectively.)
1
6
1
6
174
CXD3048R
15
9
3
3
9
15
Gain [dB]
12
6
0
6
12
100
10
1
Frequency [Hz]
1k
10k
90
18
Phase [deg
ree]
72
54
36
18
0
100
10
1
Frequency [Hz]
1k
10k
2
3
1
4
5
6
7
8
9
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Fig. 5-24c. Servo LowBooster-2 characteristics [TRK] (MCK = 128Fs)
( to correspond to to in Table 5-23c respectively.)
9
1
1
9
175
CXD3048R
1
1
1
0
IDFSL3 IDFSL2 IDFSL1 IDFSL0
0
DFSLS IDFT1 IDFT0
0
0
LPDF0 INVRFDC
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$34E (preset: $34E000)
IDFSL3:
New DFCT detection output setting.
When "0", only the DFCT signal described in 5-9 is detected and output from the DFCT
pin. (default)
When "1", the DFCT signal described in 5-9 and the new DFCT signal are switched and
output from the DFCT pin.
The switching timing is as follows.
When the 5-9 DFCT signal is low, the new DFCT signal is output from the DFCT pin.
When the 5-9 DFCT signal is high, this DFCT signal is output from the DFCT pin.
In addition, the time at which the new DFCT signal can be output after the 5-9 DFCT signal
switches to low can also be set. (See IDFT1 and IDFT0 of $34E.)
LPDF0:
DFCT signal generation mode switching.
When "0", the rise time constant of the DFCT generation circuit peak hold value is as
usual. (default)
When "1", the rise time constant of the DFCT generation circuit peak hold value is
weighed.
INVRFDC:
RFDC signal polarity inverted input setting.
When "0", the RFDC signal polarity is set to non-inverted. (default)
When "1", the RFDC signal polarity is set to inverted.
IDFSL2:
New DFCT detection time setting.
DFCT = high is held for a certain time after new DFCT detection. This command sets that time.
When "0", a long hold time. (default)
When "1", a short hold time.
IDFSL1:
New DFCT detection sensitivity setting.
When "0", a high detection sensitivity. (default)
When "1", a low detection sensitivity.
IDFSL0:
New DFCT release sensitivity setting.
When "0", a high release sensitivity. (default)
When "1", a low release sensitivity.
DFSLS:
DFCT slice level setting mode switching.
When "0", the two bits of $3B commands SDF2 and SDF1 are used to set the DFCT slice
level as usual. (default)
When "1", the six bits of $3D commands SDF6 to SDF3 and $3B commands SDF2 and
SDF1 are used to set the DFCT slice level.
IDFT1, IDFT0:
These commands set the time at which the new DFCT signal can be output (output
prohibited time) after the 5-9 DFCT signal switches to low.
IDFSL3
0
0
1
1
DFCT pin
5-9 DFCT
5-9 DFCT
New DFCT
5-9 DFCT
5-9 DFCT
L
H
L
H
IDFT1
0
0
1
1
New DFCT signal output prohibited time
204.08s
294.78s
408.16s
612.24s
IDFT0
0
1
0
1
: preset
176
CXD3048R
1
1
1
1
1
0
FBL9 FBL8 FBL7 FBL6 FBL5 FBL4 FBL3 FBL2 FBL1
--
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$34F
When D15 = D14 = D13 = D12 = D11 = 1 ($34F)
D10 = 0
FBIAS LIMIT register write
FBL9 to FBL1: Data; data compared with FB9 to FB1, FBL9 = MSB.
When using the FBIAS register in counter mode, counter operation stops when the value
of FB9 to FB1 matches with FBL9 to FBL1.
1
1
1
1
0
1
FB9
FB8
FB7
FB6
FB5
FB4
FB3
FB2
FB1
--
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
When D15 = D14 = D13 = D12 = 1 ($34F)
D11 = 0, D10 = 1
FBIAS register write
FB9 to FB1: Data; two's complement data, FB9 = MSB.
For FE input conversion, FB9 to FB1 = 011111111 corresponds to 255/256
V
DD
/4
and FB9 to FB1 = 100000000 to 256/256
V
DD
/4 respectively. (V
DD
: supply voltage)
1
1
1
1
0
0
TV9
TV8
TV7
TV6
TV5
TV4
TV3
TV2
TV1
TV0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
When D15 = D14 = D13 = D12 = 1 ($34F)
D11 = 0, D10 = 0
TRVSC register write
TV9 to TV0: Data; two's complement data, TV9 = MSB.
For TE input conversion, TV9 to TV0 = 0011111111 corresponds to 255/256
V
DD
/4
and TV9 to TV0 = 1100000000 to 256/256
V
DD
/4 respectively. (V
DD
: supply voltage)
Notes) When the TRVSC register is read out, the data length is 9 bits. At this time, data corresponding to
each bit TV8 to TV0 during external write are read out.
When reading out internally measured values and then writing these values externally, set TV9 the
same as TV8.
177
CXD3048R
FT1
FT0
FS5
FS4
FS3
FS2
FS1
FS0
FTZ
FG6
FG5
FG4
FG3
FG2
FG1
FG0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$35 (preset: $35 58 2D)
FT1, FT0, FTZ: Focus search-up speed
Default value: 010 (0.673
V
DD
V/s)
Focus drive output conversion
Focus search speed [V/s]
1.35
V
DD
0.673
V
DD
0.449
V
DD
0.336
V
DD
1.79
V
DD
1.08
V
DD
0.897
V
DD
0.769
V
DD
: preset, V
DD
: PWM driver supply voltage
FS5 to FS0:
Focus search limit voltage
Default value: 011000 ((1 24/64)
V
DD
/2, V
DD
: PWM driver supply voltage)
Focus drive output conversion
FG6 to FG0:
AGF convergence gain setting value
Default value: 0101101
$36 (preset: $36 0E 2E)
FT1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
FT0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
FTZ
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
TDZC DTZC TJ5
TJ4
TJ3
TJ2
TJ1
TJ0
SFJP TG6
TG5
TG4
TG3
TG2
TG1
TG0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
TDZC:
Selects the TZC signal for generating the TRKCNCL signal during brake circuit operation.
When "0", the edge of the HPTZC or STZC signal, whichever has the faster phase, is used.
When "1", the edge of the HPTZC, STZC signal or the tracking drive signal zero-cross,
whichever has the faster phase, is used. (See 5-12.)
DTZC:
DTZC delay (8.5/4.25s, when MCK = 128Fs)
Default value: 0 (4.25s)
TJ5 to TJ0:
Track jump voltage
Default value: 001110 ((1 14/64)
V
DD
/2, V
DD
: PWM driver supply voltage)
Tracking drive output conversion
SFJP:
Surf jump mode on/off
The tracking PWM output is generated by adding the tracking filter output and TJReg (TJ5
to TJ0), by setting D7 to "1" (on)
TG6 to TG0:
AGT convergence gain setting value
Default value: 0101110
178
CXD3048R
FZSH FZSL SM5
SM4
SM3
SM2
SM1
SM0
AGS
AGJ AGGF AGGT AGV1 AGV2 AGHS AGHT
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$37 (preset: $37 50 BA)
FZSH, FZSL:
FZC (Focus Zero Cross) slice level
Default value: 01 (1/8
V
DD
/2, V
DD
: supply voltage); FE input conversion
AGV1:
AGCNTL convergence sensitivity during high sensitivity adjustment; high/low
Default value: 1 (high)
AGV2:
AGCNTL convergence sensitivity during low sensitivity adjustment; high/low
Default value: 0 (low)
AGHS:
AGCNTL high sensitivity adjustment on/off
Default value: 1 (on)
AGHT:
AGCNTL high sensitivity adjustment time (128/256ms, when MCK = 128Fs)
Default value: 0 (256ms)
SM5 to SM0:
Sled move voltage
Default value: 010000 ((1 16/64)
V
DD
/2, V
DD
: PWM driver supply voltage)
Sled drive output conversion
AGS:
AGCNTL self-stop on/off
Default value: 1 (on)
AGJ:
AGCNTL convergence completion judgment time during low sensitivity adjustment
(31/63ms, when MCK = 128Fs)
Default value: 0 (63ms)
AGGF:
Focus AGCNTL internally generated sine wave amplitude (small/large)
Default value: 1 (large)
AGGT:
Tracking AGCNTL internally generated sine wave amplitude (small/large)
Default value: 1 (large)
: preset
FZSH
0
0
1
1
Slice level
1/4
V
DD
/2
1/8
V
DD
/2
1/16
V
DD
/2
1/32
V
DD
/2
FZSL
0
1
0
1
: preset
0 (small)
1 (large)
0 (small)
1 (large)
FE/TE input conversion
1/32 to V
DD
/2
1/16 to V
DD
/2
1/16 to V
DD
/2
1/8 to V
DD
/2
AGGF
AGGT
179
CXD3048R
VCLM VCLC FLM FLC0 RFLM RFLC AGF
AGT DFSW LKSW TBLM TCLM FLC1 TLC2 TLC1 TLC0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$38 (preset: $38 00 00)
DC offset cancel. See 5-3.
VCLM:
VC level measurement (on/off)
VCLC:
VC level compensation for FCS In register (on/off)
FLM:
Focus zero level measurement (on/off)
FLC0:
Focus zero level compensation for FZC register (on/off)
RFLM:
RF zero level measurement (on/off)
RFLC:
RF zero level compensation (on/off)
Automatic gain control. See 5-6.
AGF:
Focus auto gain adjustment (on/off)
AGT:
Tracking auto gain adjustment (on/off)
Misoperation prevention circuit
DFSW:
Defect disable switch (on/off)
Setting this switch to "1" (on) disables the defect countermeasure circuit.
LKSW:
Lock switch (on/off)
Setting this switch to "1" (on) disables the sled free-running prevention circuit.
DC offset cancel. See 5-3.
TBLM:
Traverse center measurement (on/off)
TCLM:
Tracking zero level measurement (on/off)
FLC1:
Focus zero level compensation for FCS In register (on/off)
TLC2:
Traverse center compensation (on/off)
TLC1:
Tracking zero level compensation (on/off)
TLC0:
VC level compensation for TRK/SLD In register (on/off)
Note) Commands marked with
are accepted every 2.9ms. (when MCK = 128Fs)
All commands are on when "1".
180
CXD3048R
$39 (preset: $390000)
When $3A command SVDA = 0
DAC:
Serial data readout DAC mode setting.
When "0", serial data cannot be read out. (default)
When "1", serial data can be read out.
SD6 to SD0:
These bits select the serial readout data.
--: don't care
Note) When $3A SVDA is changed, select the readout data again.
SD6
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D14
SD5
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D13
SD4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D12
SD3
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
D11
SD2
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
D10
SD1
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
--
--
--
1
1
0
0
D9
SD0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
--
--
--
1
0
1
0
D8
Readout data
Readout data
length
Coefficient RAM data
Data RAM data
RF AVRG register
RFDC input signal
FCS Bias register
TRVSC register
DFCT count
RFDC (Bottom)
RFDC (Peak)
RFDC (Peak Bottom)
VC AVRG register
FE AVRG register
TE AVRG register
FE input signal
TE input signal
SE input signal
VC input signal
8 bits
16 bits
8 bits
8 bits
9 bits
9 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
9 bits
9 bits
9 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
Coefficient RAM address
Data RAM address
DAC
SD6
SD5
SD4
SD3
SD2
SD1
SD0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
181
CXD3048R
When $3A command SVDA = 1
DAC:
This command selects whether to set readout data for the left or right channel.
When "0", right channel readout data is selected. (default)
When "1", left channel readout data is selected.
SD6 to SD0:
These bits select the data to be output from the left or right channel.
1
Right channel preset
2
Left channel preset
Note) Coefficient RAM data cannot be output from the audio DAC side.
Do not output RFDC (peak, bottom, peak-bottom) or the DFCT count from the audio
DAC side.
When $3A SVDA is changed, select the readout data again.
The DFCT count counts the number of times the DFCT signal rises while $3994 is set.
Readout outputs the DFCT count at that time.
SD6
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D14
SD5
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D13
SD4
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D12
SD3
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D11
SD2
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
0
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
D10
SD1
1
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
0
0
D9
SD0
1
0
1
0
0
0
0
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
D8
Data RAM data
RF AVRG register
RFDC input signal
FCS Bias register
TRVSC register
FCS output signal
TRK output signal
VC AVRG register
FE AVRG register
FE (A-B): FCS in Reg
TE (E-F): TRK in Reg
TE AVRG register
FE input signal
TE input signal
SE input signal
VC input signal
16 bits
8 bits
8 bits
9 bits
9 bits
8 bits
8 bits
9 bits
9 bits
9 bits
9 bits
9 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
8 bits
Data RAM address
1
2
Memory Readout
The following three memories can be readout without waiting the memory access.
M02 (Sled filter final memory)
M12 (Focus hold filter final memory)
M1A (Track hold filter final memory)
Readout data
Readout data
length
182
CXD3048R
0
FBON FBSS FBUP FBV1 FBV0 FIFZC TJD0 FPS1 FPS0 TPS1 TPS0 SVDA SJHD INBK MTI0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$3A (D15 = 0) (preset: $3A0000)
FBON:
FBIAS (focus bias) register operation setting.
FBSS
FBUP
FBV1, FBV0:
FBIAS (focus bias) counter voltage switching.
The number of FCS BIAS count-up/-down steps per cycle is decided by these bits.
FBV1
0
0
1
1
FBV0
0
1
0
1
Number of steps per cycle
1
2
4
8
The counter changes once for
each sampling cycle of the
focus servo filter. When MCK
is 128Fs, the sampling
frequency is 88.2kHz. When
converted to FE input, 1 step
is approximately 1/2
9
V
DD
/2,
V
DD
= supply voltage.
: preset
FIFZC:
This selects the FZC slice level setting command.
When "0", the FZC slice level is determined by the $37 FZSH and FZSL setting values. (default)
When "1", the FZC slice level is determined by the $3F8 FIFZB3 to FIFZB0 and FIFZA3 to
FIFZA0 setting values.
This allows more detailed setting and the addition of hysteresis compared to the $37 FZSH
and FZSL setting.
TJDO:
This sets the tracking servo filter data RAM to "0" when switched from track jump to servo
on only when SFJP = 1 (during surf jump operation).
FPS1, FPS0:
Gain setting when transferring data from the focus filter to the PWM block.
TPS1, TPS0:
Gain setting when transferring data from the tracking filter to the PWM block.
These are effective for increasing the overall gain in order to widen the servo band, etc.
Operation when FPS1, FPS0 (TPS1, TPS0) = 00 is the same as usual (7-bit shift). However,
6dB, 12dB and 18dB can be selected independently for focus and tracking by setting the
relative gain to 0dB when FPS1, FPS0 (TPS1, TPS0) = 00.
FPS1
0
0
1
1
Relative gain
0dB
+6dB
+12dB
+18dB
FPS0
0
1
0
1
: preset
TPS1
0
0
1
1
Relative gain
0dB
+6dB
+12dB
+18dB
TPS0
0
1
0
1
SVDA:
This allows the data set by the $39 command to be output through the audio DAC.
When "0", audio is output. (default)
When "1", the data set by the $39 command is output.
SJHD:
This holds the tracking filter output at the value when surf jump starts during surf jump.
INBK:
When INBK = 0 (off), the brake circuit masks the tracking drive signal with the TRKCNCL
signal which is generated by taking the MIRR signal at the TZC edge. When INBK = 1 (on),
the tracking filter input is masked instead of the drive output.
MTI0:
The tracking filter input is masked when the MIRR signal is high by setting MTI0 = 1 (on).
FBON
0
1
1
1
FBSS
0
0
1
1
FBUP
--
--
0
1
Processing
FBIAS (focus bias) register addition off.
FBIAS (focus bias) register addition on.
FBIAS register acts as a down counter.
FBIAS register acts as an up counter.
--: don't care
183
CXD3048R
1
0
0
0
FPGS1 FPGS0 TPGS1 TPGS0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$3A8 (preset : $3A 80 00)
FPGS1, FPGS0: These increase +6dB, +12dB and +18dB immediately before FCS SRCH.
TPGS1, TPGS0: These increase +6dB, +12dB and +18dB immediately before TRK JMP.
FPGS1
0
0
1
1
Gain
0dB
+6dB
+12dB
+18dB
FPGS0
0
1
0
1
: preset
TPGS1
0
0
1
1
Gain
0dB
+6dB
+12dB
+18dB
TPGS0
0
1
0
1
: preset
1
0
0
1
0
0
0
0
UDFZC
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$3A9 (preset : $3A 90 00)
UDFZC:
This detects FZC not depending on the search direction.
When "0", FZC is detected for UP search. (conventional system: default)
When "1", FZC is detected not depending on the search direction.
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
SRQ1 SRQ0
0
0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$3AFF (preset : $3A FF 00)
SRQ1, SRQ0: These bits select the ASYO output delay time.
SRQ1
0
0
1
1
SRQ0
0
1
0
1
: preset
ASYO output delay time
Approx. 0ns
Approx. 5ns
Approx. 10ns
Approx. 15ns
184
CXD3048R
SFO2 SFO1 SDF2 SDF1 MAX2 MAX1 SFOX BTF D2V2 D2V1 D1V2 D1V1 RINT
0
0
0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$3B (preset: $3B E0 50)
SFOX, SFO2, SFO1: FOK slice level
Default value: 011 (28/256
V
DD
/2, V
DD
= supply voltage)
RFDC input conversion
Slice level
16/256
V
DD
/2
20/256
V
DD
/2
24/256
V
DD
/2
28/256
V
DD
/2
32/256
V
DD
/2
40/256
V
DD
/2
48/256
V
DD
/2
56/256
V
DD
/2
: preset
SFOX
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
SFO2
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
SFO1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
SDF2, SDF1:
DFCT slice level
Default value: 10 (0.0313
V
DD
)
RFDC input conversion
Slice level
0.0156
V
DD
0.0234
V
DD
0.0313
V
DD
0.0391
V
DD
: preset, V
DD
: supply voltage
SFO2
0
0
1
1
SFO1
0
1
0
1
See the $34E command DFSLS and $3D commands SDF6 to SDF3.
MAX2, MAX1:
DFCT maximum time (MCK = 128Fs)
Default value: 00 (no timer limit)
DFCT maximum time
No timer limit
2.00ms
2.36ms
2.72ms
*
: preset
MAX2
0
0
1
1
MAX1
0
1
0
1
BTF:
Bottom hold double-speed count-up mode for MIRR signal generation
On/off (default: off)
On when "1".
185
CXD3048R
D2V2, D2V1:
Peak hold 2 for DFCT signal generation
Count-down speed setting
Default value: 01 (0.086
V
DD
/ms, 44.1kHz)
[V/ms] unit items indicate RFDC input conversion; [kHz] unit items indicate
the operating frequency of the internal counter.
Count-down speed
0.0431
V
DD
0.0861
V
DD
0.172
V
DD
0.344
V
DD
: preset, V
DD
: supply voltage
D2V2
0
0
1
1
D2V1
0
1
0
1
[V/ms]
22.05
44.1
88.2
176.4
[kHz]
D1V2, D1V1:
Peak hold 1 for DFCT signal generation
Count-down speed setting
Default value: 01 (0.688
V
DD
/ms, 352.8kHz)
[V/ms] unit items indicate RFDC input conversion; [kHz] unit items indicate
the operating frequency of the internal counter.
Count-down speed
0.344
V
DD
0.688
V
DD
1.38
V
DD
2.75
V
DD
: preset, V
DD
: supply voltage
D1V2
0
0
1
1
D1V1
0
1
0
1
[V/ms]
176.4
352.8
705.6
1411.2
[kHz]
RINT:
This initializes the initial-stage registers of the circuits which generate MIRR, DFCT and FOK.
186
CXD3048R
COSS COTS CETZ CETF COT2 COT1 MOT2
0
BTS1 BTS0 MRC1 MRC0
0
0
0
0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$3C (preset: $3C 00 80)
COSS, COTS:
These select the TZC signal used when generating the COUT signal.
STZC is the TZC generated by sampling the TE signal at 700kHz. (when MCK = 128Fs)
DTZC is the delayed phase STZC. (The delay time can be selected by D14 of $36.)
HPTZC is the fast phase TZC passed through a HPF with a cut-off frequency of 1kHz.
See 5-13.
CETZ:
Normally, the input from the TE pin enters the TRK filter and is used to generate the TZC
signal. However, the input from the CE pin can also be used. This function is for the center
error servo.
When "0", the TZC signal is generated by using the signal input to the TE pin.
When "1", the TZC signal is generated by using the signal input to the CE pin.
CETF:
When "0", the signal input to the TE pin is input to the TRK servo filter.
When "1", the signal input to the CE pin is input to the TRK servo filter.
These commands output the TZC signal.
COT2, COT1:
The COUT signal is replaced by the TZC signal. Concretely, the TZC signal is output from
the COUT pin and the TZC signal is used for auto sequence instead of the COUT signal.
: preset, --: don't care
COSS
1
0
0
TZC
STZC
HPTZC
DTZC
COTS
--
0
1
: preset, --: don't care
COT2
1
0
0
COUT pin output
STZC
HPTZC
COUT
COT1
--
1
0
MOT2:
The MIRR signal is replaced by the STZC signal. Concretely, the STZC signal is output from
the MIRR pin and the STZC signal is used for generating the COUT signal instead of the
MIRR signal.
These commands set the MIRR signal generation circuit.
BTS1, BTS0:
These set the count-up speed for the bottom hold value of the MIRR generation circuit.
The time per step is approximately 708ns (when MCK = 128Fs). The preset value is BTS1 = 1,
BTS0 = 0 like the CXD2586R. These bits are valid only when BTF of $3B is "0".
MRC1, MRC0:
These set the minimum pulse width for masking the MIRR signal of the MIRR generation circuit.
As noted in 5-9, the MIRR signal is generated by comparing the waveform obtained by
subtracting the bottom hold value from the peak hold value with the MIRR comparator
level. Strictly speaking, however, for MIRR to become high, these levels must be compared
continuously for a certain time. These bits set that time.
The preset value is MRC1 = 0, MRC0 = 0 like the CXD2586R.
BTS1
0
0
1
1
Number of count-up steps per cycle
1
2
4
8
BTS0
0
1
0
1
MRC1
0
0
1
1
Setting time [s]
5.669
11.338
22.675
45.351
MRC0
0
1
0
1
: preset (when MCK = 128Fs)
187
CXD3048R
SFID SFSK THID THSK ABEF TLD2 TLD1 TLD0 SDF6 SDF5 SDF4 SDF3
0
0
0
0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$3D (preset: $3D 00 00)
SFID:
SLED servo filter input can be obtained not from SLD in Reg, but from M0D, which is the
TRK filter second-stage output.
When the low frequency component of the tracking error signal obtained from the RF
amplifier is attenuated, the low frequency can be amplified and input to the SLD servo filter.
SFSK:
Only during TRK servo gain up2 operation, coefficient K30 is used instead of K00. Normally,
the DC gain between the TE input pin and M0D changes for TRK filter gain normal and gain
up2, and error occurs in the DC level at M0D. In this case, the DC level of the signal transmitted
to M00 can be kept uniform by adjusting the K30 value even during the above switching.
THID:
TRK hold filter input can be obtained not from SLD in Reg, but from M0D, which is the TRK
filter second-stage output.
When signals other than the tracking error signal from the RF amplifier are input to the SE
input pin, the signal transmitted from the TE pin can be obtained as TRK hold filter input.
THSK:
Only during TRK servo gain up2 operation, coefficient K46 is used instead of K40. Normally,
the DC gain between the TE input pin and M0D changes for TRK filter gain normal and gain
up2, and error occurs in the DC level at M0D. In this case, the DC level of the signal transmitted
to M18 can be kept uniform by adjusting the K46 value even during the above switching.
See "5-20. Filter Composition" regarding the SFID, SFSK, THID and THSK commands.
ABEF:
The focus error (FE) and tracking error (TE) can be generated internally.
When 0, the FE and TE signal input mode results. Input each error signal through the FE
and TE pins. (default)
When 1, the FE and TE signal generation mode results and the FE and TE signals are
generated internally.
TLD2 to TLD0:
These turn on and off SLD filter correction independently of the TRK filter.
See $38 (TLC0 to TLC2) and Fig. 5-3.
: preset, --: don't care
TLC2
0
1
Traverse center correction
TRK filter
OFF
ON
ON
TLD2
--
0
1
SLD filter
OFF
ON
OFF
TLC1
0
1
Tracking zero level correction
TRK filter
OFF
ON
ON
TLD1
--
0
1
SLD filter
OFF
ON
OFF
TLC0
0
1
VC level correction
TRK filter
OFF
ON
ON
TLD0
--
0
1
SLD filter
OFF
ON
OFF
188
CXD3048R
SDF6 to SDF3:
These set the DEFECT slice level when the $34E command DFSLS = 1.
SDF6 to SDF1
Slice level
111111
111110
111101
:
000010
000001
000000
63/256
V
DD
/2
62/256
V
DD
/2
61/256
V
DD
/2
:
2/256
V
DD
/2
1/256
V
DD
/2
0
Note) Set SDF2 and SDF1 with the $3B command.
: preset
Input coefficient sign inversion when SFID = 1 and THID = 1
The preset coefficients for the TRK filter are negative for input and positive for output. With this, the CXD3048R
outputs servo drives which have the reversed phase of input errors.
K19
TRK filter
K22
Negative input coefficient
Positive output coefficient
TE
K00
SLD filter
K05
Negative input coefficient
Positive output coefficient
SE
K40
TRK Hold filter
K45
Positive input coefficient
Positive output coefficient
TRK Hold
When SFID = 1, the TRK filter negative input coefficient is applied to the SLD filter, so the SLD input coefficient
(K00) sign must be inverted. (For example, inverting the sign for coefficient K00: E0h results in 20h.)
For the same reason, when THID = 1, the TRK hold input coefficient (K40) sign must be inverted.
K19
TRK filter
K22
Negative input coefficient
Positive output coefficient
TE
K00
SLD filter
K05
Positive input coefficient
Positive output coefficient
SE
K40
TRK Hold filter
K45
Negative input coefficient
Positive output coefficient
TRK Hold
M0D
For TRK servo gain normal
See "5-20. Filter Composition".
189
CXD3048R
F1NM F1DM F3NM F3DM T1NM T1UM T3NM T3UM DFIS TLCD
0
LKIN COIN MDFI MIRI XT1D
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$3E (preset: $3E 00 00)
F1NM, F1DM:
Quasi double accuracy setting for FCS servo filter first-stage
On when "1"; default is "0".
F1NM: Gain normal
F1DM: Gain down
T1NM, T1UM:
Quasi double accuracy setting for TRK servo filter first-stage
On when "1"; default is "0".
T1NM: Gain normal
T1UM: Gain up
F3NM, F3DM:
Quasi double accuracy setting for FCS servo filter third-stage
On when "1"; default is "0".
Generally, the advance amount of the phase increases by partially setting the FCS servo
third-stage filter which is used as the phase compensation filter to double accuracy.
F3NM: Gain normal
F3DM: Gain down
T3NM, T3UM:
Quasi double accuracy setting for TRK servo filter third-stage
On when "1"; default is "0".
Generally, the advance amount of the phase increases by partially setting the TRK servo
third-stage filter which is used as the phase compensation filter to double accuracy.
T3NM: Gain normal
T3UM: Gain up
Note) Filter first- and third-stage quasi double accuracy settings can be set individually.
See "5-20 Filter Composition" at the end of this specification concerning quasi double accuracy.
DFIS:
FCS hold filter input extraction node selection
0: M05 (Data RAM address 05); default
1: M04 (Data RAM address 04)
TLCD:
This command masks the TLC2 command set by D2 of $38 only when FOK is low.
On when "1"; default is "0".
LKIN:
When "0", the internally generated LOCK signal is output to the LOCK pin. (default)
When "1", the LOCK signal can be input from an external source to the LOCK pin.
COIN:
When "0", the internally generated COUT signal is output to the COUT pin. (default)
When "1", the COUT signal can be input from an external source to the COUT pin.
The MIRR, DFCT and FOK signals can also be input from an external source.
MDFI:
When "0", the MIRR, DFCT and FOK signals are generated internally. (default)
When "1", the MIRR, DFCT and FOK signals can be input from an external source
through the MIRR, DFCT and FOK pins.
MIRI:
When "0", the MIRR signal is generated internally. (default)
When "1", the MIRR signal can be input from an external source through the MIRR pin.
: preset, --: don't care
MDFI
0
0
1
MIRR, DFCT and FOK are all generated internally.
MIRR only is input from an external source.
MIRR, DFCT and FOK are all input from an external source.
MIRI
0
1
--
XT1D:
The input to the servo master clock is used without being frequency-divided by setting
XT1D to "1". This command takes precedence over the XTSL pin, XT2D and XT4D. See
the description of $3F for XT2D and XT4D.
190
CXD3048R
0
AGG4 XT4D XT2D
0
DRR2 DRR1 DRR0
0
ASFG FTQ
1
SRO1
0
AGHF ASOT
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$3F (preset: $3F 00 10)
AGG4:
This varies the amplitude of the internally generated sine wave using the AGGF and AGGT
commands during AGC.
When AGG4 = 0, the default is used. When AGG4 = 1, the setting is as shown in the table below.
: preset, --: don't care
AGG4
0
1
Sine wave amplitude
FE input
conversion
1/32
V
DD
/2
1/16
V
DD
/2
--
--
AGGT
--
--
0
1
0
1
0
1
TE input
conversion
--
--
1/16
V
DD
/2
1/8
V
DD
/2
0
1
--
--
0
0
1
1
AGGF
1/64
V
DD
/2
1/32
V
DD
/2
1/16
V
DD
/2
1/8
V
DD
/2
XT4D, XT2D:
MCK (digital servo master clock) frequency division ratio setting
This command forcibly sets the frequency division ratio to 1/4, 1/2 or 1/1 when MCK is
generated. See the description of $3E for XT1D. Also, see "5-2. Digital Servo Block
Master Clock (MCK)".
See $37 for AGGF and AGGT.
The presets are AGG4 = 0,
AGGF = 1 and AGGT = 1.
Frequency division ratio
According to XTSL
1/1
1/2
1/4
XT1D
0
1
0
0
XT4D
0
--
--
1
0
--
1
0
XT2D
: preset, --: don't care
DRR2 to DRR0: Partially clears the Data RAM values ("0" write).
The following values are cleared when "1" (on) respectively; default is "0".
DRR2: M08, M09, M0A
DRR1: M00, M01, M02
DRR0: M00, M01, M02 only when LOCK = low
Note) Set DRR1 and DRR0 on for 50s or more.
ASFG:
When vibration detection is performed during anti-shock circuit operation, the FCS servo
filter is forcibly set to gain normal status.
On when "1"; default is "0".
FTQ:
The slope of the output during focus search is 1/4 the conventional output slope.
On when "1"; default is "0".
191
CXD3048R
SRO1:
This command is used to continuously externally output various data inside the digital
servo block which have been specified with the $39 command. (However, D15 (DAC) of
$39 must be set to "1".)
Digital output (SOCK, XOLT and SOUT) can be obtained from three specified pins by
setting this command to "1".
AGHF:
This halves the frequency of the internally generated sine wave during AGC.
ASOT:
The anti-shock signal, which is internally detected, is output from the ATSK pin.
Output when "1"; default is "0".
Vibration detection when a high signal is output for the anti-shock signal output.
Output from XPCK pin.
Output from GFS pin.
Output from XUGF pin.
SRO1 = 1
SOLK
XOLT
SOUT
192
CXD3048R
1
0
0
0
SYG3 SYG2 SYG1 SYG0 FIFZB3 FIFZB2 FIFZB1 FIFZB0 FIFZA3 FIFZA2 FIFZA1 FIFZA0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$3F8 (preset: $3F8800)
SYG3 to SYG0: These simultaneously set the focus drive, tracking drive and sled drive output gains. See
the $AF and $CX commands for the spindle drive output gain setting.
GAIN
0 (
dB)
0.125 (18.1dB)
0.250 (12.0dB)
0.375 (8.5dB)
0.500 (6.0dB)
0.625 (4.1dB)
0.750 (2.5dB)
0.875 (1.2dB)
1.000 (0.0dB)
1.125 (+1.0dB)
1.250 (+1.9dB)
1.375 (+2.8dB)
1.500 (+3.5dB)
1.625 (+4.2dB)
1.750 (+4.9dB)
1.875 (+5.5dB)
: preset
FIFZB3 to FIFZB0:
This sets the slice level at which FZC changes from high to low.
FIFZA3 to FIFZA0:
This sets the slice level at which FZC changes from low to high.
The FIFZB3 to FIFZB0 and FIFZA3 to FIFZA0 setting values are valid only when $3A
FIFZC is "1".
Set so that the FIFZB3 to FIFZB0
FIFZA3 to FIFZA0.
Hysteresis can be added to the slice level by setting FIFZB3 to FIFZB0 < FIFZA3 to FIFZA0.
FZC slice level =
0.5
V
DD
[V]
SYG3
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SYG1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
SYG2
SYG0
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
FIFZB3 to FIFZB0 or FIFZA3 to FIFZA0 setting value
32
193
CXD3048R
1
0
0
1
FSUD FFSUP
0
1
0
0
FFS5 FFS4 FFS3 FFS2 FFS1 FFS0
D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
$3F9 (preset: $3F9000)
FSUD, FFSUP:
These set the focus search type.
The focus search is started by the $47 command.
: preset
FFS5 to FFS0:
These set the focus search amplitude voltage. Valid only when FSUD = 1.
Focus search amplitude = (1 )
0.5
V
DD
[V]
FFS5 to FFS0 setting values
64
Focus search type
The usual focus search is performed.
UP search is performed, and the focus servo is turned on at the FZC
falling edge.
Do not set.
When the upper limit value is reached during the focus search, the
focus search stops. After that, when the lower limit value is reached
UP/DOWN search is performed.
These limit values should be set with the $35 FS5 to FS0.
When the lower limit value is reached during the focus search, the
focus search stops. After that, when the upper limit value is reached
UP/DOWN search is performed.
These limit values should be set with the $35 FS5 to FS0.
FSUD
0
0
1
1
0
1
0
1
FFSUP
194
CXD3048R
Description of Data Readout
8-bit data
SOCK
(5.6448MHz)
XOLT
(88.2kHz)
SOUT
MSB
LSB
8
1
16
32
64
LSB
LSB
MSB
MSB
9-bit data
16-bit data
...
...
16-bit register
for serial/parallel
conversion
16-bit register
for latch
SOUT
SOCK
XOLT
CLK
CLK
MSB
LSB


To the 7-segment LED
To the 7-segment LED
Data is connected to the 7-segment LED
by 4-bits at a time. This enables Hex
display using four 7-segment LEDs.
MSB
LSB
SOUT
SOCK
XOLT
Serial data input
Clock input
Latch enable input
Analog
output
D/A
To an oscilloscope, etc.
Offset adjustment,
gain adjustment
Waveforms can be monitored with an oscilloscope using a serial
input-type D/A converter as shown above.
195
CXD3048R
5-19. List of Servo Filter Coefficients
<Coefficient Preset Value Table (1)>
ADDRESS
DATA
CONTENTS
K00
K01
K02
K03
K04
K05
K06
K07
K08
K09
K0A
K0B
K0C
K0D
K0E
K0F
K10
K11
K12
K13
K14
K15
K16
K17
K18
K19
K1A
K1B
K1C
K1D
K1E
K1F
K20
K21
K22
K23
K24
K25
K26
K27
K28
K29
K2A
K2B
K2C
K2D
K2E
K2F
E0
81
23
7F
6A
10
14
30
7F
46
81
1C
7F
58
82
7F
4E
32
20
30
80
77
80
77
00
F1
7F
3B
81
44
7F
5E
82
44
18
30
7F
46
81
3A
7F
66
82
44
4E
1B
00
00
SLED INPUT GAIN
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
SLED LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
SLED OUTPUT GAIN
FOCUS INPUT GAIN
SLED AUTO GAIN
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER A
FOCUS HIGH CUT FILTER B
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
FOCUS LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
FOCUS DEFECT HOLD GAIN
FOCUS PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
FOCUS OUTPUT GAIN
ANTI SHOCK INPUT GAIN
FOCUS AUTO GAIN
HPTZC / Auto Gain HIGH PASS FILTER A
HPTZC / Auto Gain HIGH PASS FILTER B
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER A
HPTZC / Auto Gain LOW PASS FILTER B
Fix
TRACKING INPUT GAIN
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER A
TRACKING HIGH CUT FILTER B
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
TRACKING LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
TRACKING PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
TRACKING OUTPUT GAIN
TRACKING AUTO GAIN
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER A
FOCUS GAIN DOWN HIGH CUT FILTER B
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
FOCUS GAIN DOWN LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
FOCUS GAIN DOWN DEFECT HOLD GAIN
FOCUS GAIN DOWN PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
FOCUS GAIN DOWN OUTPUT GAIN
Not used
Not used
Fix indicates that normal preset values should be used.
196
CXD3048R
<Coefficient Preset Value Table (2)>
ADDRESS
DATA
CONTENTS
K30
K31
K32
K33
K34
K35
K36
K37
K38
K39
K3A
K3B
K3C
K3D
K3E
K3F
K40
K41
K42
K43
K44
K45
K46
K47
K48
K49
K4A
K4B
K4C
K4D
K4E
K4F
80
66
00
7F
6E
20
7F
3B
80
44
7F
77
86
0D
57
00
04
7F
7F
79
17
6D
00
00
02
7F
7F
79
17
54
00
00
SLED INPUT GAIN (Only when TRK gain up2 is accessed with SFSK = 1.)
ANTI SHOCK LOW PASS FILTER B
Not used
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-H
ANTI SHOCK HIGH PASS FILTER B-L
ANTI SHOCK FILTER COMPARATE GAIN
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER A
TRACKING GAIN UP2 HIGH CUT FILTER B
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-H
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER A-L
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-H
TRACKING GAIN UP2 LOW BOOST FILTER B-L
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER A
TRACKING GAIN UP PHASE COMPENSATE FILTER B
TRACKING GAIN UP OUTPUT GAIN
Not used
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-H
TRACKING HOLD FILTER A-L
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-H
TRACKING HOLD FILTER B-L
TRACKING HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN
TRACKING HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
(Only when TRK gain up2 is accessed with THSK = 1.)
Not used
FOCUS HOLD FILTER INPUT GAIN
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-H
FOCUS HOLD FILTER A-L
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-H
FOCUS HOLD FILTER B-L
FOCUS HOLD FILTER OUTPUT GAIN
Not used
Not used
197
CXD3048R
5-20. Filter Composition
The internal filter composition is shown below.
K
: Coefficient RAM address, M
: Data RAM address
K0D
K0C
K0E
K10
Z
K0B
Z
K09
K0A
M04
M03
2
M06
Z
K11
K13
FCS
AUTO Gain
M07
2
1
K06
AGFON
K06
DFCT
FCS
Hold Reg2
FCS
In Reg
Sin ROM
K08
Z
1
1
1
1
M05
K29
K28
K2A
K2C
Z
K27
Z
K25
K26
M04
M03
2
2
M06
Z
K2D
K13
FSC
AUTO Gain
M07
2
K06
DFCT
FCS
Hold Reg2
FCS
In Reg
K24
Z
M05
2
7
7
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K0B and K0D coefficients to "0".
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K27 and K29 coefficients to "0".
2
7
PWM
BK2
Z
Z
FCS SRCH
BK1
BK5
Z
Z
BK4
FPS1, 0
BK3
BK6
K0F
M1E
K0F
M1F
To FCS
Hold
To FCS
Hold
K2B
M1E
To FCS
Hold
K2B
M1F
To FCS
Hold
FPGS1, 0
1
1
1
1
1
7
7
1
1
1
1
FCS Servo Gain Normal fs = 88.2kHz
FCS Servo Gain Down fs = 88.2kHz
198
CXD3048R
K1F
K1E
K20
K21
Z
K1D
Z
K1B
K1C
M0C
M0B
2
M0E
Z
K22
K23
TRK
AUTO Gain
M0F
2
1
K19
AGTON
K19
DFCT
TRK
Hold Reg
TRK
In Reg
Sin ROM
K1A
Z
M0D
To SLD Servo,
TRK Hold
K3D
Z
Z
K1B
K3C
M0C
M0B
K3E
K23
TRK
AUTO Gain
M0F
2
K19
DFCT
TRK
Hold Reg
TRK
In Reg
K1A
Z
M0E
2
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K1D and K1F coefficients to "0".
K3B
K3A
K3C
K3D
Z
K39
Z
K37
K38
M0C
M0B
2
M0E
Z
K3E
K23
TRK
AUTO Gain
M0F
2
1
K19
DFCT
TRK
Hold Reg
TRK
In Reg
K36
Z
M0D
2
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K39 and K3B coefficients to "0".
2
7
BK2
Z
Z
TRK JMP
BK1
BK5
Z
Z
BK4
BK8
Z
Z
BK7
TPS1, 0
BK9
BK3
BK6
PWM
TPGS1, 0
1
1
7
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
7
1
1
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRK Servo Gain Normal fs = 88.2kHz
TRK Servo Gain Up1 fs = 88.2kHz
TRK Servo Gain Up2 fs = 88.2kHz
199
CXD3048R
K0D
K0C
80H
K10
Z
K0B
Z
7FH
K0A
M03
2
M06
Z
K11
K13
FCS
AUTO Gain
M07
2
1
K06
AGFON
K06
DFCT
FCS
Hold Reg 2
FCS
In Reg
Sin ROM
81H
Z
2
K06
DFCT
FCS
Hold Reg 2
FCS
In Reg
2
2
7
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K0B and K0D coefficients during normal operation, and of the K0B, K09 and K0E coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K27 and K29 coefficients during normal operation, and of the K24, K25 and K2A coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".
K0E
2
K09
2
K08
2
K29
K28
80H
K2C
Z
K27
Z
7FH
K26
M03
2
M06
Z
K2D
K13
FCS
AUTO Gain
M07
81H
Z
2
K2A
2
K25
2
K24
2
BK2
Z
Z
FCS SRCH
BK1
BK5
Z
Z
BK4
FPS1, 0
PWM
BK3
BK6
81H, 7FH and 80H are each Hex display 8-bit fixed values
when set to quasi double accuracy.
M04
M05
M04
M05
K0F
M1E
To FCS
Hold
K0F
M1F
To FCS
Hold
K2B
M1E
To FCS
Hold
K2B
M1F
To FCS
Hold
FPGS1, 0
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
7
1
1
7
1
1
1
7
7
7
7
1
1
1
1
FCS Servo Gain Normal; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3EAXX0)
FCS Servo Gain Down; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3E5XX0)
200
CXD3048R
2
1
K19
AGTON
K19
DFCT
TRK
Hold Reg
TRK
In Reg
Sin ROM
2
K19
DFCT
TRK
Hold Reg
TRK
In Reg
2
1
K19
DFCT
TRK
Hold Reg
TRK
In Reg
K1F
K1E
80H
K21
Z
K1D
Z
7FH
K1C
M0C
M0B
2
M0E
Z
K22
K23
TRK
AUTO Gain
M0F
81H
Z
M0D
2
K20
2
K1B
2
K1A
2
K3D
Z
K3C
Z
7FH
80H
M0C
M0B
K3E
K23
TRK
AUTO Gain
M0F
81H
Z
2
K1B
2
K1A
2
K3B
K3A
80H
K3D
Z
K39
Z
7FH
K38
M0C
M0B
2
M0E
Z
K3E
K23
TRK
AUTO Gain
M0F
81H
Z
M0D
2
K3C
2
K37
2
K36
2
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K1D and K1F coefficirnts during normal operation, and of the K1A, K1B and K20 coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K1A, K1B and K3C coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K39 and K3B coefficients during normal operation, and of the K36, K37 and K3C coefficients during quasi double accuracy to "0".
M0E
BK2
Z
Z
PWM
TRK JMP
BK1
BK5
Z
Z
BK4
TPS1, 0
BK8
Z
Z
BK7
2
7
BK3
BK6
BK9
81H, 7FH and 80H are each Hex display 8-bit fixed values
when set to quasi double accuracy.
TPGS1, 0
1
7
1
1
1
7
7
7
7
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
1
1
1
1
7
7
7
7
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
TRK Servo Gain Normal; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3EXAX0)
TRK Servo Gain Up2; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3EX5X0)
TRK Servo Gain Up1; fs = 88.2kHz, during quasi double accuracy (Ex.: $3EX5X0)
201
CXD3048R
SLD Servo fs = 345Hz
K04
K03
Z
K02
Z
K01
K00
M00
2
2
M01
K05
K07
TRK
AUTO Gain
PWM
2
7
SLD MOV
M02
SLD
In Reg
2
K30
SFSK (only when TGup2 is used.)
SFID
M0D
TRK SERVO FILTER
Secont-stage output
1
1
1
7
7
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K02 and K04 coefficients to "0".
HPTZC/Auto Gain fs = 88.2kHz
K15
K17
Z
K14
M08
M09
M0A
Z
AUTO Gain
Reg
2
AGTON
AGFON
AGFON
FCS
In Reg
TRK
In Reg
Sin ROM
Z
Slice
TZC Reg
Slice
2
1
1
1
1
1
202
CXD3048R
Anti Shock fs = 88.2kHz
K34
K33
Z
Z
K31
K16
Z
M09
M08
2
M0A
K35
Comp
K12
Anti Shock
Reg
2
TRK
In Reg
1
1
1
1
7
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K34 coefficient to "0".
The comparator level is 1/16 the maximum amplitude of the comparator input.
AVRG fs = 88.2kHz
M08
AVRG Reg
2
VC, TE, FE,
RFDC
Z
2
1
1
7
TRK Hold fs = 345Hz
K44
K43
Z
K42
Z
K41
K40
M18
2
2
M19
K45
TRK
Hold Reg
SLD
In Reg
2
K46
THSK (only when TGup2 is used.)
THID
M0D
TRK SERVO FILTER
Second-stage output
1
1
1
7
7
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K42 and K44 coefficients to "0".
FCS Hold fs = 345Hz
K4C
K4B
Z
K4A
Z
K49
K48
M10
2
2
M11
K4D
FCS
Hold Reg 2
K0F
M05
K2B
K2B when using the
FCS Gain Down filter
DFIS
($3E)
M04
FCS SERVO FILTER
First-stage output
FCS SERVO FILTER
Second-stage output
M1F
M1E
M12
1
1
7
7
Note) Set the MSB bit of the K4A and K4C coefficients to "0".
203
CXD3048R
5-21. TRACKING and FOCUS Frequency Response
20k
1k
100
10
2.1
10
0
10
20
30
40
180
0
180
90
90
NORMAL
GAIN DOWN
G
f Frequency [Hz]
20k
1k
100
10
2.1
10
0
10
20
30
40
G Gain [dB]
180
Phase [deg
ree]
0
180
90
90
Tracking frequency response
f Frequency [Hz]
G Gain [dB]
Phase [deg
ree]
Focus frequency response
G
NORMAL
GAIN UP
When using the preset coefficients with the boost function off.
When using the preset coefficients with the boost function off.
204
CXD3048R
[6] Application Circuit
Application circuits shown are typical examples illustrating the operation of the devices. Sony cannot
assume responsibility for any problems arising out of the use of these circuits or for any infringement of
third party patent and other right due to same.
R4M
WDCK
SBSO
V
CC
XRAS
XCAS
XWE
XOE
A11 to A0
V
SS
D3 to D0
D
ATA
SENS
XLA
T
XSOE
SYSM
XRDE
SCOR
XRST
PWMI
XQOK
XWRE
SQCK
SCLK
SQSO
XEMP
XWIH
CXD3048R
4M DRAM or 16M DRAM
CLOK
C176
MDS
Vcc
SLED
SPDL
GND
SSTP
FZC
TE
CE
VC
FE
TD
V
CC
GND
RFO
FD
Driver setting
XPCK
XUGF
GFS
C2PO
COUT
MIRR
FOK
DFCT
DOUT
LRMU
36
35
34
31
32
33
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30
1
40
39
38
37
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
70 69 68 67
63
64
65
66
61
62
71
72
97
96
95
94
91
92
93
99
98
73
74
81
82
83
84
75
76
77
78
88 87 86 85
79
80
89
90
TE
CE
RF
A
C
AV
DD
3
BIAS
ASYI
AV
SS
3
VPCO
VCTL
CL
TV
FILO
FILI
PCO
V
DD
1
GFS
C2PO
COUT
MIRR
FOK
DFCT
A
TSK
DOUT
AV
DD
0
ASY
O
XUGF
LRMU
XRAS
XWE
D1
TEST1
TEST2
XCAS
WFCK
A9
A8
A7
DV
SS
A6
A5
A4
XRDE
V
DD
0
CLOK
D
ATA
SENS
XLA
T
XSOE
SYSM
WDCK
SCOR
XRST
XQOK
D3
D2
D0
PWMI
HPL
HV
SS
XTSL
EXCK
SBSO
XWIH
XEMP
SCLK
SQCK
V
SS
0
R4M
XWRE
VREFR
AV
SS
2
AV
SS
1
VREFL
AOUT1
AV
DD
1
XV
SS
XTAO
XTAI
XV
DD
HV
DD
HPR
TES1
AV
DD
2
AOUT2
SQSO
TEST
V
SS
1
XPCK
AV
SS
0
IGEN
RFDC
PCMD
PCMDI
BCK
BCKI
DV
DD
A3
A2
A0
A10
A11
TEST3
TEST4
FFDR
TRDR
TFDR
SRDR
SFDR
SSTP
MDS
MDP
C176
V
DD
2
LRCKI
VC
V
SS
2
FRDR
A1
FE
SE
LRCK
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
205
CXD3048R
Sony Corporation
Package Outline Unit: mm
SCT A'ssy
Renesas A'ssy
SONY CODE
EIAJ CODE
JEDEC CODE
PACKAGE STRUCTURE
PACKAGE MATERIAL
LEAD TREATMENT
LEAD MATERIAL
PACKAGE MASS
EPOXY RESIN
SOLDER PLATING
COPPER ALLOY
0.5
0.22 0.05
M
0.1
DETAIL A
DETAIL B
0.22 0.05
(0.2)
(0.125)
0.145
0.03
1.7 MAX
1.4 0.1
B
A
120PIN LQFP (PLASTIC)
LQFP-120P-L01
LQFP120-P-1616
0.8g
1
30
31
60
61
90
91
120
0.1
S
S
S
18.0 0.2
16.0 0.1
(17.0)
(0.5)
0 to 10
0.1 0.05
0.6
0.15
0.25
LEAD PLATING SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
LEAD MATERIAL
COPPER ALLOY
SOLDER COMPOSITION
Sn-Bi Bi:1-4wt%
PLATING THICKNESS
5-18
m
SPEC.
120
120PIN LQFP (PLASTIC)
(0.5)
0 to 10
DETAIL A
1.7MAX
A
S
S
0.10
B
16.0 0.1
18.0 0.2
1
91
90
61
60
31
30
0.5
b
M
S
0.10
SONY CODE
EIAJ CODE
JEDEC CODE
PACKAGE STRUCTURE
PACKAGE MATERIAL
LEAD TREATMENT
LEAD MATERIAL
PACKAGE MASS
EPOXY RESIN
SOLDER
COPPER ALLOY
LQFP-120P-L051
P-LQFP120-16x16-0.5
0.8g
b=0.22 0.05
0.17
DETAIL B
1.4 0.1
0.1 0.05
(17.0)
1.0
0.2
(0.15)
(0.2)
+ 0.08



- 0.05
0.25
0.6
0.15
LEAD PLATING SPECIFICATIONS
ITEM
LEAD MATERIAL
COPPER ALLOY
SOLDER COMPOSITION
Sn-Bi Bi:1-4wt%
PLATING THICKNESS
5-18
m
SPEC.